WO2009003003A2 - Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues - Google Patents

Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2009003003A2
WO2009003003A2 PCT/US2008/068115 US2008068115W WO2009003003A2 WO 2009003003 A2 WO2009003003 A2 WO 2009003003A2 US 2008068115 W US2008068115 W US 2008068115W WO 2009003003 A2 WO2009003003 A2 WO 2009003003A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
compound
tetrahydro
beta
cβalkyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2008/068115
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2009003003A3 (en
Inventor
Timothy M. Caldwell
Yang Gao
Yuelian Xu
Linghong Xie
Original Assignee
Neurogen Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Neurogen Corporation filed Critical Neurogen Corporation
Priority to AU2008268442A priority Critical patent/AU2008268442A1/en
Priority to BRPI0813647-5A2A priority patent/BRPI0813647A2/en
Priority to JP2010515057A priority patent/JP2010531364A/en
Priority to US12/666,314 priority patent/US20110002855A1/en
Priority to EP08780968A priority patent/EP2162451A4/en
Priority to CA2690748A priority patent/CA2690748A1/en
Priority to CN200880104013A priority patent/CN101784541A/en
Priority to MX2009013897A priority patent/MX2009013897A/en
Publication of WO2009003003A2 publication Critical patent/WO2009003003A2/en
Publication of WO2009003003A3 publication Critical patent/WO2009003003A3/en
Priority to IL202699A priority patent/IL202699A0/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • C07D471/14—Ortho-condensed systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/08—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for nausea, cinetosis or vertigo; Antiemetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/02—Nasal agents, e.g. decongestants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/06—Antimigraine agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16—Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/20—Hypnotics; Sedatives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/02—Nutrients, e.g. vitamins, minerals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D491/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C07D491/044—Ortho-condensed systems with only one oxygen atom as ring hetero atom in the oxygen-containing ring
    • C07D491/048—Ortho-condensed systems with only one oxygen atom as ring hetero atom in the oxygen-containing ring the oxygen-containing ring being five-membered
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • C07D491/14—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C07D491/147—Ortho-condensed systems the condensed system containing one ring with oxygen as ring hetero atom and two rings with nitrogen as ring hetero atom
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D495/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D495/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D495/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D495/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D495/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • C07D495/14—Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • This invention relates generally to piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta- carbolines and related analogues, and to the use of such compounds for treating conditions responsive to histamine H3 receptor modulation.
  • the invention further relates to the use of such compounds as probes for the detection and localization of histamine H3 receptors.
  • G proteins coupled guanosine triphosphate-binding proteins
  • GPCRs G protein-coupled receptors
  • Histamine is a multifunctional chemical transmitter that signals through specific cell surface GPCRs.
  • Histamine receptor subtypes have been identified: Hl, H2, H3 and H4.
  • Histamine H3 receptor is a presynaptic GPCR that is found primarily in the central nervous system, although lower levels are also found in the peripheral nervous system.
  • Genes encoding the H3 receptor have been reported in various organisms, including humans (see Lovenberg et al. (1999) Molecular Pharmacology 55: 1101-07), and alternative splicing of this gene appears to result in multiple isoforms.
  • the histamine H3 receptor is an auto- and hetero-receptor whose activation leads to a decreased release of neurotransmitters (including histamine, acetylcholine, norepinephrine and glutamate) from neurons in the brain. Histamine H3 receptor is involved in the regulation of processes such as sleep and wakefulness, feeding and memory.
  • Antagonists of histamine H3 receptor increase synthesis and release of cerebral histamine and other neurotransmitters, inducing an extended wakefulness, an improvement in cognitive processes, a reduction in food intake and a normalization of vestibular reflexes.
  • Such antagonists are useful, for example, as therapeutics for central nervous system disorders such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, schizophrenia, mood and attention alterations including attention deficit hyperactivity disorder and attention deficit disorder, memory and learning disorders, cognitive disorders (such as mild cognitive impairment and cognitive deficits in psychiatric pathologies), epilepsy, migraine, and disorders associated with the regulation of sleep and wakefulness, as well as in the treatment and prevention of conditions such as obesity, eating disorders, diabetes, vertigo, motion sickness and allergic rhinitis.
  • the present invention provides piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula I:
  • Formula I including the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates) and esters thereof.
  • Y is C or N; represents a 5- or 6-membered optionally substituted heteroaryl that is fused to
  • ⁇ 2 ⁇ — (- ⁇ )m Y N represents phenyl or a 5 -or 6-membered heteroaryl that is fused to the ring
  • phenyl or heteroaryl is optionally substituted and preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) hydrogen, amino, halogen, cyano, hydroxy, nitro and oxo; and
  • Ci-C 6 alkyl C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, C 1 - C ⁇ alkoxy, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl, C 2 -Cealkyl ether, Ci-C ⁇ alkylsulfonyl, mono-or di- (Ci-C 6 alkyl)aminoCo-C 4 alkyl, phenylCo-C 2 alkyl or (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)Co-C 2 alkyl; each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with oxo, Ci-C 6 alkyl or Ci-C 6 alkoxy; n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; m is 0, 1 or 2; o is 1 or 2;
  • R 2 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-C ⁇ alkyl (e.g., C 2 - Cealkyl or C 3 -C 6 alkyl), C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl,
  • R 4 and R5 are:
  • Ci-C 2 alkyl (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-
  • Csalkylene bridge each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C 2 -Cealkenyl, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, Ci- C ⁇ haloalkoxy, Ci-C ⁇ alkylthio, C 2 -Cealkyl ether, Ci-C ⁇ alkanoyl, Cs-C ⁇ alkanone, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C?cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-C ⁇ al
  • piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues are H3 receptor modulators that exhibit a K 1 at a histamine H3 receptor, preferably a human H3 receptor, that is no greater than 4 micromolar, 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar, as determined using an assay for H3 receptor GTP binding.
  • piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated).
  • a detectable marker e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated
  • the present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue as provided herein in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • methods for modulating H3 receptor activity, comprising contacting a cell (e.g., neuronal) expressing H3 receptor with at least one H3 receptor modulator as described herein. Such contact may occur in vivo or in vitro and is generally performed using a concentration of compound that is sufficient to alter H3 receptor GTP binding in vitro (e.g., using the assay provided in Example 7, herein).
  • a cell e.g., neuronal
  • H3 receptor modulator as described herein.
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to H3 receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one H3 receptor modulator.
  • Such conditions include, for example, attention deficit disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, dementia, schizophrenia, cognitive disorders (including mild cognitive impairment), epilepsy, migraine, excessive daytime sleepiness (EDS) and related disorders such as shift work disorder, fatigue and fatigue-related disorders, jet lag, narcolepsy, sleep apnea, allergic rhinitis, vertigo, motion sickness, memory disorders such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, obesity, eating disorders and diabetes.
  • the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of H3 receptor in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a H3 receptor modulator as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the H3 receptor modulator to H3 receptor; and (b) detecting a level of the H3 modulator bound to H3 receptor.
  • the present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition as described herein in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat one or more conditions responsive to H3 receptor modulation, such as the conditions recited herein.
  • the present invention provides methods of preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates.
  • the present invention provides piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues.
  • Such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo, to modulate H3 receptor activity in a variety of contexts.
  • piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues encompasses all compounds of Formula I, including any enantiomers, racemates and stereoisomers, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates) and esters of such compounds.
  • a "pharmaceutically acceptable salt” of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity or carcinogenicity, and preferably without irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication.
  • Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids.
  • Specific pharmaceutically acceptable anions for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to, acetate, 2- acetoxybenzoate, ascorbate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bromide, calcium edetate, carbonate, chloride, citrate, dihydrochloride, diphosphate, ditartrate, edetate, estolate (ethylsuccinate), formate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycolate, glycollylarsanilate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydroxymaleate, hydroxynaphthoate, iodide, isethionate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, maleate, mandelate, methylbro
  • pharmaceutically acceptable cations for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to ammonium, benzathine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine, procaine, and metals such as aluminum, calcium, lithium, magnesium, potassium, sodium and zinc.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method.
  • such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
  • nonaqueous media such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile
  • prodrugs of the compounds of the recited Formulas are provided herein.
  • a "prodrug” is a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound a formula provided herein.
  • a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of a compound as provided herein.
  • Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively.
  • Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, esters such as acetate, formate and benzoate derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within the compounds provided herein.
  • Prodrugs of the compounds provided herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved in vivo to yield the parent compounds.
  • alkyl refers to a straight or branched chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon.
  • Alkyl groups include groups having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (Ci-Cgalkyl), from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (Ci-C ⁇ alkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (Ci-C 4 alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-bvXyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl and 3-methylpentyl.
  • alkylene refers to a divalent alkyl group, which may be straight or branched.
  • Ci-C 4 alkylene is an alkylene group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • "Co- C 4 alkyl” or “Co-C 4 alkylene” is a single covalent bond (Co) or an alkylene group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • Alkenyl refers to straight or branched chain alkene groups, which comprise at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyl groups include C 2 - Csalkenyl, C 2 -C6alkenyl and C 2 -C 4 alkenyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively, such as ethenyl, allyl or isopropenyl. "Alkynyl” refers to straight or branched chain alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond.
  • Alkynyl groups include C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, C 2 -Cealkynyl and C 2 -C 4 alkynyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • a “cycloalkyl” is a group that comprises one or more saturated and/or partially saturated rings in which all ring members are carbon, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, adamantyl, decahydro-naphthalenyl, octahydro-indenyl, and partially saturated variants of the foregoing, such as cyclohexenyl. Cycloalkyl groups do not comprise an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring.
  • a "(C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl” is a Cs-Cgcycloalkyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a methylene or ethylene group; C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl is a directly linked
  • alkoxy is meant an alkyl group attached via an oxygen bridge.
  • Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy has from 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the alkyl portion of the group.
  • Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2-pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3- methylpentoxy are representative alkoxy groups.
  • alkylthio refers to an alkyl group attached via a sulfur bridge.
  • Alkanoyl groups have the indicated number of carbon atoms, with the carbon of the keto group being included in the numbered carbon atoms.
  • a C 2 alkanoyl group is an acetyl group having the formula
  • Ci-C 6 alkanoyl groups contain from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • An “alkanone” is a ketone group in which carbon atoms are in a linear or branched alkyl arrangement.
  • Cs-C ⁇ alkanone refers to an alkanone having from 3 to
  • alkyl ether refers to a linear or branched ether substituent (i.e., an alkyl group that is substituted with an alkoxy group).
  • a C 2 alkyl ether has the structure -CH 2 -O-CHs;
  • a C 2 -C6alkyl ether has a total of 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 carbon atoms.
  • alkoxycarbonyl refers to an alkoxy group attached through a keto
  • “Ci-C ⁇ alkoxycarbonyl” groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the alkyl portion of the group.
  • Alkylsulfonyl refers to groups of the formula -(S ⁇ 2 )-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment.
  • Ci-Cealkylsulfonyl has from 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the alkyl group.
  • Alkylamino refers to a secondary or tertiary amine that has the general structure -NH-alkyl or -N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups.
  • groups include, for example, mono- and di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino groups, in which each Ci-C ⁇ alkyl may be the same or different.
  • Alkylaminoalkyl refers to an alkylamino group linked via an alkylene group (i.e., a group having the general structure -alkylene-NH-alkyl or -alkylene- N(alkyl)(alkyl)) in which each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups.
  • Alkylaminoalkyl groups include, for example, mono- and di-(Ci-C 8 alkyl)aminoCi-C 8 alkyl, mono- and di-(Ci-C 6 alkyl)aminoCi-C 6 alkyl and mono- and di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCi-C 4 alkyl.
  • "Mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo- C 2 alkyl” refers to a mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino group linked via a single covalent bond or a methylene or ethylene group.
  • alkyl as used in the terms “alkylamino” and “alkylaminoalkyl” differs from the definition of "alkyl” used for all other alkyl- containing groups, in the inclusion of cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups (e.g., (C 3 -C 7 CyC loalkyl)Co-C 6 alkyl).
  • halogen refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • a “haloalkyl” is an alkyl group that is substituted with 1 or more halogen atoms (e.g., "Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms).
  • haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono- , di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-l-trifluoromethyl-ethyl.
  • Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl.
  • haloalkoxy refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above attached via an oxygen bridge.
  • Ci- C ⁇ haloalkoxy have 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • a dash (“-") that is not between two letters or symbols is used to indicate a point of attachment for a substituent.
  • -CONH 2 is attached through the carbon atom.
  • a “carbocycle” or “carbocyclic group” comprises at least one ring formed entirely by carbon-carbon bonds (referred to herein as a carbocyclic ring), and does not contain a heterocycle.
  • Certain representative carbocycles are cycloalkyl as described above.
  • Other carbocycles are aryl (i.e., contain at least one aromatic ring).
  • PhenylCo-C 2 alkyl is a phenyl, benzyl or phenethyl moiety.
  • a “heterocycle” or “heterocyclic group” has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings (and typically from 3 to 15 ring members in total), at least one of which is a heterocyclic ring (i.e., one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom independently chosen from O, S and N, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon). Additional rings, if present, may be heterocyclic or carbocyclic. Typically, a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocyclic ring has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring.
  • Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments) and certain heterocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings contain from 9 to 14 ring members.
  • Certain heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO 2 .
  • Heterocycles may be optionally substituted with a variety of substituents, as indicated.
  • a heterocycle may be a heterocycloalkyl group (i.e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated) or a heteroaryl group (i.e., at least one ring within the group is aromatic), and may be linked via any ring atom, provided that a stable compound results.
  • Heterocyclic groups include, for example, acridinyl, azepanyl, azocinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzimidazolinyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzotriazolylcarbazolyl, benztetrazolyl, NH-carbazolyl, carbolinyl, chromanyl, chromenyl, cinnolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, dihydrofuro[2,3-b]tetrahydrofuran, dihydroisoquinolinyl, dihydrotetrahydrofuranyl, l,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]dec-8-yl, dithiazinyl, furanyl, furazanyl,
  • heterocycles are 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl groups (e.g., pyridyl, pyrimidyl and pyridazinyl), each of which may be substituted as indicated.
  • Other heterocycles are 4- to 8- membered heterocycloalkyl groups, which are saturated or partially saturated heterocycles as described above, containing 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 ring members.
  • a "(4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl” is a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl group that is linked via a single covalent bond or a methylene or ethylene group.
  • a “substituent,” as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest.
  • a “ring substituent” may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group discussed herein that is covalently bonded to an atom (preferably a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member.
  • substitution refers to replacing one or more hydrogen atoms in a molecular structure with a substituent as described above, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution.
  • Groups that are "optionally substituted” are unsubstituted or substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different).
  • Optional substitution is also indicated by the phrase "substituted with from 0 to X substituents," where X is the maximum number of permissible substituents.
  • Certain optionally substituted groups are substituted with from 0 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents (i.e., are unsubstituted or substituted with up to the recited maximum number of substituents).
  • Other optionally substituted groups are substituted with at least one substituent (e.g., substituted with from 1 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents).
  • H3 receptor is used herein to refer to any histamine H3 subtype receptor, including human H3 receptor (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 6,136,559), H3 receptor found in other mammals and chimeric receptors retaining H3 function, including the chimeric H3 receptor provided as SEQ ID NO:8 in US Patent Application Serial Number 11/355,711, which published as US 2006/0188960.
  • a "H3 receptor modulator,” also referred to herein as a “modulator,” is a compound that modulates H3 receptor GTP binding.
  • a H3 receptor modulator may be a H3 receptor agonist or antagonist.
  • a modulator binds with "high affinity” if the K 1 at H3 receptor is less than 4 micromolar, preferably less than 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar.
  • a representative assay for evaluating an effect on H3 receptor GTP binding is provided in Example 7, herein. Unless otherwise specified, the terms “IC50” and “EC50,” as used herein, refer to values obtained using the assay as described in Example 7.
  • a modulator is considered an "antagonist” if it detectably inhibits H3 receptor agonist-stimulated GTP binding (using, for example, the representative assay provided in Example 7); in general, such an antagonist inhibits such GTP binding with a IC50 value of less than 4 micromolar, preferably less than 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar.
  • H3 receptor antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists.
  • An "inverse agonist" of H3 receptor is a compound that reduces the GTP binding activity of H3 receptor below its basal activity level in the absence of added agonist. Inverse agonists of H3 receptor may also inhibit the activity in the presence of agonist.
  • the basal activity of H3 receptor, as well as the reduction in H3 receptor GTP binding activity due to the presence of H3 receptor antagonist, may be determined using the assay of Example 7.
  • a "neutral antagonist" of H3 receptor is a compound that inhibits the activity of H3 receptor agonist, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within the assay of Example 7 performed in the absence of agonist, H3 receptor activity is reduced by no more than 10%, preferably by no more than 5%, and more preferably by no more than 2%; most preferably, there is no detectable reduction in activity).
  • the basal activity is the level of GTP binding observed in the assay in the absence of added histamine or any other agonist, and in the further absence of any test compound.
  • Neutral antagonists of H3 receptor may, but need not, inhibit the binding of agonist to H3 receptor.
  • H3 receptor agonist is a compound that elevates the activity of the receptor above the basal activity level of the receptor.
  • H3 receptor agonist activity may be identified using the representative assay provided in Example 7. In general, such an agonist has an EC50 value of less than 4 micromolar, preferably less than 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar within the assay provided in Example 7. If the GTP binding activity brought about by a test compound attains the same level to that of histamine, it is defined as a full agonist. If the level of GTP binding activity brought about by a test compound is above baseline but below the level attained by histamine, it is defined as a partial agonist. Preferred antagonists do not elevate GTP binding activity under such conditions more than 10% above baseline, preferably not more than 5% above baseline, and most preferably not more than 2% above baseline.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, results in a discernible patient benefit (e.g., provides detectable relief from a condition being treated). Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including alleviation of one or more symptoms characteristic of the condition.
  • a therapeutically effective amount or dose generally results in a concentration of compound in a body fluid (such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine) that is sufficient to alter H3 receptor GTP binding in vitro. It will be apparent that the discernible patient benefit may be apparent after administration of a single dose, or may become apparent following repeated administration of the therapeutically effective dose according to a predetermined regimen, depending upon the indication for which the compound is administered.
  • a “patient” is any individual treated with a piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro- beta-carboline or related analogue provided herein.
  • Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock. Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to H3 receptor modulation, or may be free of such symptom(s) (e.g., treatment may be prophylactic).
  • the present invention provides piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula I:
  • H3 receptor modulators that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the therapeutic treatment of human and animal patients as discussed below. H3 receptor modulators may also be used within in vitro assays (e.g., assays for receptor activity), and as probes for detection and localization of H3 receptor.
  • Formula Ia in which: p is 1, 2 or 3; Re represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, Ci- C ⁇ haloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; R 7 is Ci-Cealkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, (C3-Cgcycloalkyl)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, phenylCo-C 2 alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C 2 -Cealkenyl, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkoxy, Ci-C ⁇ alkylthi
  • R ⁇ is as described for Formula Ia
  • Rg is mono- or di-(Ci-C 6 alkyl)aminoCo-C 2 alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C 2 -C6alkenyl, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy,
  • Formula Ic Formula Id in which p is 0, 1, 2 or 3; Re and R 7 are as described for Formula Ia; q is 1, 2 or 3; and the remaining variables are as described for Formula I.
  • Formula II or are a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof.
  • A, B, D and E are independently N or CRi; such that is aromatic;
  • W, X and Y are independently C or N; Z is CR 9 , N, NR 3 , S or O; n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; m is 0, 1 or 2; o is 1 or 2;
  • Each Ri is independently:
  • Ci-C 6 alkyl C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, (C 3 -C 8 CyC loalkyl)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, Ci-
  • R 2 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from C 2 -Cealkyl, C 2 - C ⁇ alkenyl, C 2 -Cealkynyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C 3 alkylene bridge;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl,
  • R9 is hydrogen, amino, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C 2 -C6alkenyl, C 2 -C6alkynyl, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl, C 2 - C ⁇ alkyl ether, Ci-C ⁇ aminoalkyl, or mono-or di-(Ci-C 6 alkyl)aminoCo-C 6 alkyl.
  • Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula II further satisfy Formula lib: Formula lib in which p, R 6 and Rg are as described for Formula Ib; and the remaining variables are as described for Formula II.
  • Formula Hc Formula Hd in which p, R 6 and R7 are as described for Formula Ha; q is 1, 2 or 3; and the remaining variables are as described for Formula II.
  • Certain piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula I, Formula II and the various subformulas thereof further satisfy one or more of the following: (i) W and Y are carbon, and Z is oxygen or sulfur.
  • X, W and Y are carbon, and Z is nitrogen or NR3.
  • X and W are carbon, Y is nitrogen, and Z is nitrogen or NR3.
  • X and W are carbon; Y is nitrogen; and Z is CR3.
  • W is carbon, and exactly one of A, B, D and E is nitrogen.
  • W is carbon, A is nitrogen, and exactly one of B, D and E is nitrogen,
  • A, B, D and E are independently chosen from CRi.
  • A is carbon; and exactly two of B, D and E are nitrogen.
  • Still further piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula II further satisfy one of the following Formulas, in which variables are generally as described above:
  • A, B, D and E are independently nitrogen or
  • CRi such that exactly zero, one or two of A, B, D and E are nitrogen
  • Re represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci-C ⁇ alkyl and Ci- C ⁇ haloalkyl
  • R 7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Cs-C ⁇ alkyl.
  • each Ri is independently chosen from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, Ci-C ⁇ alkanoyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl.
  • Formula III or are a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof.
  • Ci-C 6 alkyl C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, Ci-
  • Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl C 2 -Cealkyl ether, Ci-C ⁇ alkylsulfonyl, mono-or di-
  • R 2 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C 2 - C ⁇ alkenyl, C 2 -C6alkynyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, Ci-C 6 haloalkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 2 -C6aminoalkyl, or mono-or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoC 2 -C6alkyl;
  • R 4 and R5 are:
  • Ci- Csalkylene bridge each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C 2 -C6alkenyl, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, Ci-
  • Formula IIIc Formula Md in which p is 0, 1, 2 or 3 ; and R ⁇ and R 7 are as described for Formula Ilia.
  • p is 0, 1, 2 or 3 ; and R ⁇ and R 7 are as described for Formula Ilia.
  • Formula Me Formula Mf wherein G, J and K are independently nitrogen or CRi; such that exactly zero, one or two of G, J and K are nitrogen; R5 represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci-C ⁇ alkyl and Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl; and R 7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Cs-C ⁇ alkyl.
  • R 5 , R 6 and R7 are as described above and Rio and Rn are independently chosen from: (i) hydrogen; and (ii) Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C 2 -Cealkenyl, C 2 -Cealkynyl, (C 3 - C8cycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, and groups that are taken together to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with any group consistent with Formula I.
  • R ⁇ represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci- C ⁇ alkyl and Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl; and R 7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Cs-C ⁇ alkyl; in further such compounds, R 5 is hydrogen or Ci-C ⁇ alkyl; and Rio and Rn are independently chosen from: (i) hydrogen; and (ii) Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C2- C ⁇ alkenyl, C 2 -Cealkynyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, and groups that are taken together to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, cyano, Ci- C 4 alkyl mono- or di-(Ci-C 4 alkyl)amino.
  • piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues include, but are not limited to, those specifically described in Examples 1-3. It will be apparent that the specific compounds recited herein are representative only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Further, as noted above, all compounds of the present invention may be present as a free acid or base or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester. In certain aspects, piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein are H3 receptor modulators, as determined using an assay for H3 receptor GTP binding.
  • references herein to an "assay for H3 receptor GTP binding" are intended to refer to the in vitro GTP binding assay provided in Example 7, which may be performed in the presence or absence of added agonist.
  • a H3 receptor preparation is incubated with a H3 receptor agonist (e.g., histamine or an analogue thereof such as R-alpha-methyhistamine), labeled (e.g., 35 S) GTP and unlabeled test compound.
  • a H3 receptor agonist e.g., histamine or an analogue thereof such as R-alpha-methyhistamine
  • labeled e.g., 35 S
  • the H3 receptor used is preferably mammalian H3 receptor (e.g., human or rat H3 receptor, and preferably human H3 receptor), and more preferably a chimeric human H3 receptor such as a receptor having the sequence provided in SEQ ID NO:8.
  • the H3 receptor may be recombinantly expressed or naturally expressed.
  • the H3 receptor preparation may be, for example, a membrane preparation from cells that recombinantly express H3 receptor. Incubation with a H3 receptor modulator results in a decrease or increase in the amount of label bound to the H3 receptor preparation, relative to the amount of label bound in the absence of the compound.
  • piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues that are H3 receptor antagonists are preferred within certain embodiments.
  • the response is preferably reduced by at least 20%, more preferably at least 50% and still more preferably at least 80%, as compared to cells that are contacted with the agonist in the absence of the piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue.
  • the IC50 for H3 receptor antagonists provided herein is preferably less than 4 micromolar, less than 1 micromolar, less than 50OnM, less than 100 nM, less than 50 nM or less than 10 nM.
  • H3 receptor antagonists provided herein exhibit no detectable agonist activity in the assay of Example 7 at a concentration of compound equal to the IC50.
  • Certain preferred antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity in the assay at a concentration of the antagonist that is 100- fold higher than the IC50.
  • preferred H3 receptor modulators provided herein are non-sedating.
  • a dose of H3 receptor modulator that is twice the minimum therapeutically effective dose causes only transient (i.e., lasting for no more than 1 A the time that the therapeutic effect lasts) or preferably no statistically significant sedation in an animal model assay of sedation (using the method described by Fitzgerald et al. (1988) Toxicology 49(2-3):433-9).
  • a dose that is any of 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 times the minimum therapeutically effective dose does not produce statistically significant sedation.
  • a H3 receptor modulator does not produce sedation at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg (preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg).
  • H3 receptor modulators provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective concentrations of the compound at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, and still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred H3 receptor modulator is nontoxic when a therapeutically effective amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred H3 receptor modulator produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred H3 receptor modulator exhibits an in vivo half-life allowing for Q.
  • oral bioavailability preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective concentrations of the compound at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg,
  • LD. dosing preferably T. LD. dosing, more preferably B. LD. dosing, and most preferably once-a-day dosing).
  • differential penetration of the blood brain barrier may be desirable for certain H3 receptor modulators.
  • Routine assays that are well known in the art may be used to assess these properties, and identify superior compounds for a particular use.
  • assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, such as Caco-2 cell monolayers.
  • Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously).
  • Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays or whole serum binding assays.
  • In vitro half-lives of compounds may be predicted from assays of microsomal half-life as described within Example 8 of PCT Publication Number WO 06/089076.
  • nontoxic As noted above, preferred piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues are nontoxic.
  • the term "nontoxic” as used herein shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration (“FDA") for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans).
  • FDA United States Food and Drug Administration
  • a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, or (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes.
  • a compound that does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 9 of PCT Publication Number WO 06/089076.
  • cells treated as described in Example 9 therein with 100 ⁇ M of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • a compound that does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC50 for the compound, hi certain preferred embodiments, a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals.
  • statically significant is meant results varying from control at the p ⁇ 0.1 level or more preferably at the p ⁇ 0.05 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
  • a compound does not cause substantial liver enlargement if daily treatment of laboratory rodents (e.g., mice or rats) for 5-10 days with a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound results in an increase in liver to body weight ratio that is no more than 100% over matched controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not cause liver enlargement of more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. If non-rodent mammals (e.g., dogs) are used, such doses should not result in an increase of liver to body weight ratio of more than 50%, preferably not more than 25%, and more preferably not more than 10% over matched untreated controls. Preferred doses within such assays include 0.01, 0.05. 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally.
  • a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if administration of twice the minimum dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory rodents by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls.
  • a H3 receptor modulator does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) that are equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound do not cause detectable release of any such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, there is no detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels when such compound concentrations are five-fold, and preferably ten-fold the EC50 or IC50 for the compound.
  • certain preferred compounds do not substantially inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYP 1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound.
  • microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities such as CYP 1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound.
  • Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal the EC50 or IC50 for the compound.
  • certain preferred H3 receptor modulators do not induce sister chromatid exchange (e.g., in Chinese hamster ovary cells) at such concentrations.
  • piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled.
  • one or more atoms may be replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 11 C, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 18 O, 17 O, 31 P, 32 P, 35 S, 18 F and 36 Cl.
  • substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2 H) can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
  • Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein may generally be prepared using standard synthetic methods.
  • PG protecting group such as BOC or a benzyl group
  • Scheme 1 illustrates the preparation of compounds 5. Cyclic amine 2 is reacted with halogen substituted acylchloride 1 in the presence of a base such as sodium bicarbonate to afford halogen substituted carboxamide 3, which is treated with tetrahydro-lH-beta-carbolines or related amine analogue 4 in the presence of a base such as potassium carbonate to produce 5.
  • a base such as sodium bicarbonate
  • Scheme 2 illustrates the preparation of compounds 10. Condensation of 6 with 5-aminopyrazole 7 provides 8, which is then converted to amine 9 upon deprotection. Alkylation of 9 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 10. Scheme 3
  • Scheme 3 illustrates the preparation of compounds 14. Condensation of 11 with 5-aminopyrazole 7 provides 12, which is then converted to amine 13 upon deprotection. Alkylation of 13 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 14.
  • Scheme 6 illustrates the preparation of amide analogues 25.
  • Compound 19 is alkylated with t-butyl bromoacetate to form 23. After refluxing in 4N HCl dioxane, deprotection of the t-butyl ester forms carboxylic acid 24, which is transformed into amide 25 upon coupling with an appropriate amine in the presence of a coupling reagent such as DMC or BOP.
  • a coupling reagent such as DMC or BOP.
  • Scheme 7 illustrates the preparation of azaindole analogues 36 and 36'.
  • Compound 28 is formed by a Fisher indole reaction between 26 and 27 (Annali di Chimica (Rome, Italy) (1965) 55(12): 1223-32 and Farmaco, Ediette Scientifica (1964) 19(9):741-50). Amide reduction forms 29 and subsequent deprotection yields 33.
  • compound 33 can be formed from carbaldehyde 30. Condensation between 30 and nitromethane yields nitroalkene 31. Reduction to the azatryptamine 32 followed by a Pictet-Spangler cyclization yields 33.
  • a third method for producing 33 is to start from azaindole 34 and perform a Friedel-Crafts alkylation with ethyl oxalyl chloride to form the oxalate ester, which is immediately treated with NH 3 in MeOH to form amide 35 (see Journal of Organic Chemistry (2002) 67(17):6226-27; PCT International Application Publication Number WO 2006/061212 and US Patent Application Publication Number 2004-0192718). Reduction of the amide forms 32 which is cyclized using a Pictet-Spangler cyclization to yield 33. Alkylation with carboxamide 3 or a related diamine under standard alkylation conditions provides 36 and 36'.
  • Scheme 8 illustrates the preparation of indole analogues 41.
  • Compound 38 is formed by a Fisher indole reaction between 26 and 37 (Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry (2006) 43(3):571-78). Deprotection of 38 yields 40.
  • the nitrogen of indole 38 can be alkylated directly with an alkyl-halide or arylated by a Buchwald reaction to form indole 39. Deprotection of 39 forms amine 40.
  • a number of 2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-pyrido[4,3-b]indoles are commercially available (e.g., from AKos Consulting and Solutions GmbH). Alkylation of 40 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 41.
  • Scheme 9 illustrates the preparation of compounds 46.
  • alkylation with chloroacetonitrile forms 43 Either direct reduction with LiAlH 4 to form 45 or stepwise reduction of the nitrile and cyclization to form 44 followed by reduction forms 45 (see Guandalini et al., Archive for Organic Chemistry (ARCHIVOC) 2004(v):286-300 and Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2004) 14(4): 1003-05).
  • Alkylation of 45 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 46.
  • Scheme 10 illustrates the method for preparing 51.
  • Alcohol 46 is known in the literature (e.g., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. (2002) 20:2377-80) or conveniently prepared by a variety of methods familiar to those skilled in the art.
  • Compound 46 is treated with methanesulfonyl chloride to give 47, which is converted to 48 upon treatment with sodium azide in DMF.
  • the azido compound 48 is reduced by triphenylphosphine to give amine 49, which is transformed to 50 through a Pictet- Spengler cyclization. Alkylation of 50 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 51.
  • Compounds 54 may be prepared in accordance with Scheme 11.
  • Amine 52 is available from commercial sources such as Aldrich (St Louis, MO) or may be synthesized from commercially available precursors using established protocols or readily apparent variations thereon.
  • Treatment of 52 with paraformaldehyde in formic acid under Pictet-Spengler cyclization conditions provides compound 53.
  • Treatment of 53 with carboxamide 3 in the presence of a base such as potassium carbonate produces compound 54.
  • Scheme 12
  • Scheme 12 illustrates the preparation of compounds 57, 60 and 62.
  • the tricyclic intermediate 55 is commercially available, known in the literature (e.g., Ach. Mod. Chem. (1994) 131 :489-98) or conveniently prepared by a variety of methods.
  • Treatment of compound 55 with an alkyl halide in acetonitrile followed by deprotection gives pyrimidone 56.
  • Alkylation of 56 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 57.
  • Compound 55 can also be converted to chloride compound 58 upon treatment with phosphorous oxychloride in the presence of a base such as pyridine at 100 0 C; hydrogenation of compound 58 in the presence of palladium on charcoal provides compound 59, which is transformed to compound 60 upon deprotection followed by a standard alkylation reaction with carboxamide 3.
  • Compound 58 is heated with sodium methoxide in methanol to give intermediate 61, which upon deprotection and reaction with 3 is converted to compound 62.
  • a piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue provided herein may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms, so that the compound can exist in different stereoisomeric forms.
  • Such forms can be, for example, racemates or optically active forms.
  • All stereoisomers are encompassed by the present invention. Nonetheless, it may be desirable to obtain single enantiomers (i.e., optically active forms).
  • Standard methods for preparing single enantiomers include asymmetric synthesis and resolution of the racemates. Resolution of the racemates can be accomplished, for example, by conventional methods such as crystallization in the presence of a resolving agent, or chromatography using, for example a chiral HPLC column.
  • Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope.
  • Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14 C), hydrogen (e.g., 3 H), sulfur (e.g., 35 S) or iodine (e.g., 125 I).
  • Tritium-labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum-catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous- catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate.
  • certain precursors may be subjected to tritium-halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate.
  • Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds.
  • compositions comprising one or more piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogues provided herein, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, water, buffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans), mannitol, proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives.
  • Preferred pharmaceutical compositions are formulated for oral delivery to humans or other animals (e.g., companion animals such as dogs or cats).
  • other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
  • compositions may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, inhalation (e.g., nasal or oral), topical, oral, nasal, rectal or parenteral administration.
  • parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique.
  • compositions in a form suitable for oral use are preferred. Such forms include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs.
  • compositions of the present invention may be formulated as a lyophilizate.
  • compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations.
  • Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets.
  • excipients include, for example, inert diluents to increase the bulk weight of the material to be tableted (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents that modify the disintegration rate in the environment of use (e.g., corn starch, starch derivatives, alginic acid and salts of carboxymethylcellulose), binding agents that impart cohesive qualities to the powdered material(s) (e.g., starch, gelatin, acacia and sugars such as sucrose, glucose, dextrose and lactose) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, stearic acid or talc). Tablets may be formed using standard techniques, including dry granulation, direct compression and wet granulation. The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil).
  • an inert solid diluent e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin
  • an oil medium e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil
  • Aqueous suspensions comprise the active material(s) in admixture with one or more suitable excipients, such as suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally-occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monooleate).
  • suspending agents e.g
  • Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredients in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin.
  • the oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol.
  • Sweetening agents and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations.
  • Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, such as sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present.
  • compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions.
  • the oily phase may be a vegetable oil (e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil (e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums (e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally- occurring phosphatides (e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides (e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoleate).
  • An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents.
  • Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • a pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension. The active ingredient(s), depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle.
  • Such a composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents water, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectable compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
  • compositions may also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration).
  • Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non- irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the body temperature and will therefore melt in the body to release the drug.
  • suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
  • compositions for inhalation typically can be provided in the form of a solution, suspension or emulsion that can be administered as a dry powder or in the form of an aerosol using a conventional propellant (e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane).
  • a conventional propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane.
  • compositions may be formulated for release at a predetermined rate.
  • Instantaneous release may be achieved, for example, via sublingual administration (i.e., administration by mouth in such a way that the active ingredient(s) are rapidly absorbed via the blood vessels under the tongue rather than via the digestive tract).
  • Controlled release formulations i.e., formulations such as a capsule, tablet or coated tablet that slows and/or delays release of active ingredient(s) following administration
  • a controlled release formulation comprises a matrix and/or coating that delays disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract (or implantation site) and thereby provides a delayed action or a sustained action over a longer period.
  • One type of controlled- release formulation is a sustained-release formulation, in which at least one active ingredient is continuously released over a period of time at a constant rate.
  • the therapeutic agent is released at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations are maintained within the therapeutic range, but below toxic levels, over a period of time that is at least 4 hours, preferably at least 8 hours, and more preferably at least 12 hours.
  • Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site.
  • Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release.
  • the amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • Controlled release may be achieved by combining the active ingredient(s) with a matrix material that itself alters release rate and/or through the use of a controlled- release coating.
  • the release rate can be varied using methods well known in the art, including (a) varying the thickness or composition of coating, (b) altering the amount or manner of addition of plasticizer in a coating, (c) including additional ingredients, such as release-modifying agents, (d) altering the composition, particle size or particle shape of the matrix, and (e) providing one or more passageways through the coating.
  • the amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the method of administration (e.g., the site of implantation), the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • the matrix material which itself may or may not serve a controlled-release function, is generally any material that supports the active ingredient(s).
  • a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • Active ingredient(s) may be combined with matrix material prior to formation of the dosage form (e.g., a tablet).
  • active ingredient(s) may be coated on the surface of a particle, granule, sphere, microsphere, bead or pellet that comprises the matrix material. Such coating may be achieved by conventional means, such as by dissolving the active ingredient(s) in water or other suitable solvent and spraying.
  • a controlled release is achieved through the use of a controlled release coating (i.e., a coating that permits release of active ingredient(s) at a controlled rate in aqueous medium).
  • the controlled release coating should be a strong, continuous film that is smooth, capable of supporting pigments and other additives, non-toxic, inert and tack-free.
  • Coatings that regulate release of the modulator include pH- independent coatings, pH-dependent coatings (which may be used to release modulator in the stomach) and enteric coatings (which allow the formulation to pass intact through the stomach and into the small intestine, where the coating dissolves and the contents are absorbed by the body). It will be apparent that multiple coatings may be employed (e.g., to allow release of a portion of the dose in the stomach and a portion further along the gastrointestinal tract). For example, a portion of active ingredient(s) may be coated over an enteric coating, and thereby released in the stomach, while the remainder of active ingredient(s) in the matrix core is protected by the enteric coating and released further down the GI tract.
  • pH dependent coatings include, for example, shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid ester copolymers and zein.
  • the coating is a hydrophobic material, preferably used in an amount effective to slow the hydration of the gelling agent following administration.
  • Suitable hydrophobic materials include alkyl celluloses (e.g., ethylcellulose or carboxymethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, acrylic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxy ethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid alkamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polyacrylamide, ammonio methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride) and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers) and mixtures of the foregoing.
  • Representative aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose include, for example, AQUACOAT® (FMC Corp., Philadelphia, PA) and SURELEASE® (Colorcon, Inc., West Point, PA), both of which can be applied to the substrate according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Representative acrylic polymers include, for example, the various EUDRAGIT® (Rohm America, Piscataway, NJ) polymers, which may be used singly or in combination depending on the desired release profile, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Suitable plasticizers for alkyl celluloses include, for example, dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate and triacetin.
  • Suitable plasticizers for acrylic polymers include, for example, citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate and tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil and triacetin.
  • Controlled-release coatings are generally applied using conventional techniques, such as by spraying in the form of an aqueous dispersion.
  • the coating may comprise pores or channels or to facilitate release of active ingredient. Pores and channels may be generated by well known methods, including the addition of organic or inorganic material that is dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use.
  • pore-forming materials include hydrophilic polymers, such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses (e.g., hydroxypropylmethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, synthetic water-soluble polymers (e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone, cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone and polyethylene oxide), water-soluble polydextrose, saccharides and polysaccharides and alkali metal salts.
  • a controlled release coating may include one or more orifices, which may be formed my methods such as those described in US Patent Nos. 3,845,770; 4,034,758; 4,077,407; 4,088,864; 4,783,337 and 5,071,607. Controlled-release may also be achieved through the use of transdermal patches, using conventional technology (see, e.g., US Patent No. 4,668,232).
  • controlled release formulations may be found, for example, in US Patent Nos. 4,572,833; 4,587,117; 4,606,909; 4,610,870; 4,684,516; 4,777,049; 4,994,276; 4,996,058; 5,128,143; 5,202,128; 5,376,384; 5,384,133; 5,445,829; 5,510,119; 5,618,560; 5,643,604; 5,891,474; 5,958,456; 6,039,980; 6,143,353; 6,126,969; 6,156,342; 6,197,347; 6,387,394; 6,399,096; 6,437,000; 6,447,796; 6,475,493; 6,491,950; 6,524,615; 6,838,094; 6,905,709; 6,923,984; 6,923,988; and 6,911,217.
  • a piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue provided herein may be conveniently added to food or drinking water (e.g., for administration to non- human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock).
  • Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water.
  • Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein are generally present within a pharmaceutical composition at levels providing a therapeutically effective amount upon administration, as described above.
  • Dosage forms providing dosage levels ranging from about 0.1 mg to about 140 mg per kilogram of body weight per day are preferred (about 0.5 mg to about 7 g per human patient per day).
  • the amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated and the particular mode of administration.
  • Dosage unit forms generally contain between from about 0.1 mg to about 2 g, preferably 0.5 mg to 1 g, and more preferably 1 mg to 500 mg, of an active ingredient.
  • Optimal dose for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, including the activity of the specific compound employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time and route of administration; the rate of excretion; any simultaneous treatment, such as a drug combination; and the type and severity of the particular disease undergoing treatment. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing and procedures that are well known in the art.
  • compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to H3 receptor modulation, including those specifically recited herein.
  • Packaged pharmaceutical preparations comprise a container holding one or more dosage units comprising a therapeutically effective amount of at least one H3 receptor modulator as described herein and instructions (e.g., labeling) indicating that the contained composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to H3 receptor modulation in the patient.
  • instructions e.g., labeling
  • H3 receptor modulators provided herein may be used to alter activity and/or activation of H3 receptors in a variety of contexts, both in vitro and in vivo.
  • H3 receptor modulators may be used to inhibit or enhance (preferably to inhibit) H3 receptor activity in vitro or in vivo.
  • such methods comprise the step of contacting a H3 receptor with one or more H3 receptor modulators provided herein, in aqueous solution and under conditions otherwise suitable for binding of the modulator(s) to H3 receptor.
  • the H3 receptor modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter H3 receptor GTP binding activity in vitro (using the assay provided in Example 7).
  • the H3 receptor may be present in solution or suspension (e.g., in an isolated membrane or cell preparation), or in a cultured or isolated cell.
  • the H3 receptor is present in a patient (e.g., expressed by a neuronal cell), and the aqueous solution is a body fluid.
  • one or more H3 receptor modulators are administered to a patient in an amount such that each H3 receptor modulator is present in at least one body fluid of the patient at a therapeutically effective concentration that is 1 micromolar or less; preferably 500 nanomolar or less; more preferably 100 nanomolar or less, 50 nanomolar or less, 20 nanomolar or less, or 10 nanomolar or less.
  • such compounds may be administered at a dose that is less than 20 mg/kg body weight, preferably less than 5 mg/kg and, in some instances, less than 1 mg/kg.
  • modulation of H3 receptor activity may be assessed by detecting an alteration of a symptom (e.g., memory or attention) in a patient being treated with one or more H3 receptor modulators provided herein.
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating conditions responsive to H3 receptor modulation.
  • treatment encompasses both disease-modifying treatment and symptomatic treatment, either of which may be prophylactic (i.e., before the onset of symptoms, in order to prevent, delay or reduce the severity of symptoms) or therapeutic (i.e., after the onset of symptoms, in order to reduce the severity and/or duration of symptoms).
  • a condition is "responsive to H3 receptor modulation” if it is characterized by inappropriate activity of H3 receptor, regardless of the amount of H3 receptor ligand present locally, and/or if modulation of H3 receptor activity results in alleviation of the condition or a symptom thereof.
  • Such conditions may be diagnosed and monitored using criteria that have been established in the art. Patients may include humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock, with dosages as described above.
  • Conditions that are responsive to H3 receptor modulation include, for example:
  • Cardiovascular disorders including atherosclerosis, hypertension, myocardial infarction, coronary heart disease and stroke; Cancer (e.g., endometrial, breast, prostate and colon cancer, cutaneous carcinoma, medullary thyroid carcinoma and melanoma); Metabolic disorders including impaired glucose tolerance, dyslipidaemia, and diabetes
  • Immune conditions and disorders including osteoarthritis, allergy (e.g., allergic rhinitis), and inflammation;
  • Respiratory conditions including nasal congestion, upper airway allergic response, asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
  • Disorders associated with the regulation of sleep and wakefulness, or arousal and vigilance including excessive daytime sleepiness (EDS), shift work disorder, narcolepsy, jet lag, and sleep disorders such as primary insomnia, idiopathic hypersomnia, circadian rhythm sleep disorder, dyssomnia NOS, parasomnias including nightmare disorder, sleep terror disorder, sleep disorders secondary to depression, anxiety and/or other mental disorders and sub stance- induced sleep disorder;
  • EDS excessive daytime sleepiness
  • narcolepsy narcolepsy
  • jet lag and sleep disorders
  • sleep disorders such as primary insomnia, idiopathic hypersomnia, circadian rhythm sleep disorder, dyssomnia NOS, parasomnias including nightmare disorder, sleep terror disorder, sleep disorders secondary to depression, anxiety and/or other mental disorders and sub stance- induced sleep disorder;
  • Fatigue and fatigue-related disorders such as sleep/fatigue disorders, sleep impairment due to perimenopausal hormonal shifts, Parkinson's-related fatigue, multiple sclerosis-related fatigue, and chemotherapy-induced fatigue;
  • Eating disorders e.g., bulimia, binge eating and anorexia
  • Digestive system and gastrointestinal disorders including gallbladder disease, ulcer, hyper- and hypo-motility of the gastrointestinal tract and irritable bowel syndrome
  • CNS disorders including hyper- and hypo-activity of the central nervous system, migraine, epilepsy, seizures, convulsions, mood disorders, attention deficit disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, bipolar disorder, depression, manic disorders, obsessive compulsive disorder, schizophrenia, migraine, vertigo, motion sickness, dementia, cognitive deficit (e.g., in psychiatric disorder, such as mild cognitive impairment), learning deficit, memory deficit (e.g., age-related memory dysfunction), multiple sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease and other neurodegenerative disorders, addiction (e.g., resulting from drug abuse), neurogenic inflammation and Tourette's syndrome;
  • psychiatric disorder such as mild cognitive impairment
  • learning deficit e.g., age-related memory dysfunction
  • Vestibular dysfunction e.g., Meniere's disease, dizziness and motion sickness
  • Pain e.g., inflammatory pain or neuropathic pain
  • itch e.g., inflammatory pain or neuropathic pain
  • Septic shock e.g., Septic shock
  • Glaucoma e.g., Glaucoma
  • piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues are used to treat Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, schizophrenia, mood and attention alterations including attention deficit hyperactivity disorder and attention deficit disorder, memory and learning disorders, cognitive disorders (such as mild cognitive impairment and cognitive deficits in psychiatric pathologies), epilepsy, migraine, and disorders associated with the regulation of sleep and wakefulness, as well as in the treatment and prevention of conditions such as obesity, eating disorders, diabetes, vertigo, motion sickness and allergic rhinitis.
  • Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated.
  • a frequency of administration of 4 times daily or less is preferred, hi general, a dosage regimen of 2 times daily is more preferred, with once a day dosing particularly preferred.
  • the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy. In general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented.
  • H3 receptor modulators provided herein may be used within combination therapy for the treatment of conditions that are responsive to H3 receptor modulation, as described above.
  • such H3 modulators may be used in combination with drugs that are associated with induction of sleepiness as an adverse effect, so as to limit induction of sleepiness.
  • a H3 receptor modulator is administered to a patient along with a second therapeutic agent that is not a H3 receptor modulator.
  • the H3 receptor modulator and second therapeutic agent may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order. It will be apparent that additional therapeutic agents may, but need not, also be administered.
  • Second therapeutic agents suitable for use in such combination therapy include, for example, antiobesity agents, antidiabetics, antihypertensive agents, antidepressants, antipsychotic agents and anti-inflammatory agents.
  • the second therapeutic agent is a compound for the treatment of attention deficit disorder or attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, an antipsychotic agent or an anti-obesity agent.
  • Histamine Hl receptor modulators represent one class of second therapeutic agents. Combination with Hl receptor modulators may be used, for example, in the treatment of Alzheimer's disease, inflammatory diseases and allergic conditions.
  • Representative Hl receptor antagonists include, for example, loratadine, desloratadine, fexofenadine and cetirizine.
  • Hl receptor antagonists include ebastine, mizolastine, acrivastine, astemizole, azatadine, azelastine, brompheniramine, chlorpheniramine, clemastine, cyproheptadine, dexchlorpheniramine, diphenhydramine, hydroxyzine, levocabastine, promethazine and tripelenamine. Many of these agents are known to induce sleepiness as an adverse effect.
  • Antiobesity therapeutic agents for use in combination therapy include, for example, leptin, leptin receptor agonists, melanin concentrating hormone (MCH) receptor antagonists, melanocortin receptor 3 (MC3) agonists, melanocortin receptor 4 (MC4) agonists, melanocyte stimulating hormone (MSH) agonists, cocaine and amphetamine regulated transcript (CART) agonists, dipeptidyl aminopeptidase inhibitors, a growth hormone secretagogue, beta-3 adrenergic agonists, 5HT-2 agonists, orexin antagonists, neuropeptide Yi or Y5 antagonists, tumor necrosis factor (TNF) agonists, galanin antagonists, urocortin agonists, cholecystokinin (CCK) agonists, GLP-I agonists, serotonin (5HT) agonists, bombesin agonists, CBl antagonists such as rimonabant, growth hormone, growth factors
  • Representative such agents include, for example, sibutramine, dexfenfluramine, dextroamphetamine, amphetamine, orlistat, mazindol, phentermine, phendimetrazine, diethylpropion, fluoxetine, bupropion, topiramate and ecopipam.
  • Antihypertensive therapeutic agents for use in combination therapy include, for example, beta-blockers such as alprenolol, atenolol, timolol, pindolol, propranolol and metoprolol, angiotensin converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors such as benazepril, captopril, enalapril, fosinopril, lisinopril, quinapril and ramipril, calcium channel blockers such as nifedipine, felodipine, nicardipine, isradipine, nimodipine, diltiazem and verapamil, alpha-blockers such as doxazosin, urapidil, prazosin and terazosin, and angiotensin receptor blockers such as losartan.
  • beta-blockers such as alprenolol, atenolol, timolol, pind
  • CNS-active agents for use in combination therapy include, but are not limited to the following, many of which are know to induce sleepiness as an adverse effect: for anxiety, depression, mood disorders or schizophrenia - serotonin receptor (e.g., 5- HT IA ) agonists and antagonists, neurokinin receptor antagonists, GABAergic agents, and corticotropin releasing factor receptor (CRFi) antagonists; for sleep disorders - melatonin receptor agonists; and for neurodegenerative disorders - such as Alzheimer's dementia, nicotinic agonists, muscarinic agents, acetylcholinesterase inhibitors and dopamine receptor agonists.
  • schizophrenia - serotonin receptor e.g., 5- HT IA
  • neurokinin receptor antagonists e.g., GABAergic agents, and corticotropin releasing factor receptor (CRFi) antagonists
  • sleep disorders - melatonin receptor agonists e.g., melatonin receptor agonists
  • such combination therapy may include a selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) or a non-selective serotonin, dopamine and/or norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor.
  • SSRI selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor
  • agents include, for example, fluoxetine, sertraline, paroxetine, amitriptyline, seroxat and citalopram.
  • representative agents for use in combination therapy include GABAergic agents.
  • therapeutic agents suitable for combination therapy include, for example, agents that modify cholinergic transmission (e.g., 5-HT ⁇ antagonists), Ml muscarinic agonists, M2 muscarinic antagonists and acetylcholinesterase inhibitors.
  • agents that modify cholinergic transmission e.g., 5-HT ⁇ antagonists
  • Ml muscarinic agonists e.g., Ml muscarinic agonists
  • M2 muscarinic antagonists e.g., acetylcholinesterase inhibitors.
  • Suitable doses for H3 receptor modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Doses and methods of administration of other therapeutic agents can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference.
  • the combination administration of a H3 receptor modulator with the second therapeutic agent results in a reduction of the dosage of the second therapeutic agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (i.e., a decrease in the minimum therapeutically effective amount).
  • the dosage of second therapeutic agent in a combination or combination treatment method is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the second therapeutic agent without combination administration of a H3 receptor modulator.
  • this dosage is less than 3 A, even more preferably less than 1 A, and highly preferably, less than 1 A of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for the second therapeutic agent when administered without combination administration of a H3 receptor modulator. It will be apparent that the dosage amount of H3 receptor modulator component(s) of the combination needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be affected by the dosage amount and potency of the other therapeutic component(s) of the combination.
  • the combination administration of a H3 receptor modulator with other therapeutic agent(s) is accomplished by packaging one or more H3 receptor modulators and one or more other therapeutic agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same contained as a mixture of one or more H3 receptor modulators and one or more other therapeutic agents.
  • Preferred mixtures are formulated for oral administration (e.g., as pills, capsules, tablets or the like).
  • the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the one or more H3 receptor modulators and one or more other therapeutic agents are to be taken together for the treatment of attention deficit disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, schizophrenia, a cognitive disorder (such as mild cognitive impairment), epilepsy, migraine, a sleep disorder, excessive daytime sleepiness (EDS), shift work disorder, narcolepsy, allergic rhinitis, vertigo, motion sickness, a memory disorder such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, obesity, an eating disorder or diabetes.
  • a cognitive disorder such as mild cognitive impairment
  • epilepsy migraine
  • a sleep disorder excessive daytime sleepiness (EDS)
  • EDS excessive daytime sleepiness
  • shift work disorder narcolepsy
  • allergic rhinitis vertigo
  • motion sickness a memory disorder
  • a memory disorder such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, obesity, an eating disorder or diabetes.
  • the present invention provides a variety of non- pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta- carbolines and related analogues provided herein.
  • such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of H3 receptor (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof).
  • compounds provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group
  • a suitable reactive group such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group
  • Compounds provided herein may further be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity, as standards for determining the ability of a candidate agent to bind to H3 receptor, or as radiotracers for positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or for single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT). Such methods can be used to characterize H3 receptors in living subjects.
  • PET positron emission tomography
  • SPECT single photon emission computerized tomography
  • a piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques (e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and incubated with a sample for a suitable incubation time (e.g., determined by first assaying a time course of binding).
  • unbound piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta- carboline or related analogue is removed (e.g., by washing), and bound piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue detected using any method suitable for the label employed (e.g., autoradiography or scintillation counting for radiolabeled compounds; spectroscopic methods may be used to detect luminescent groups and fluorescent groups).
  • a matched sample containing labeled compound and a greater (e.g., 10-fold greater) amount of unlabeled compound maybe processed in the same manner.
  • Detection assays including receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of H3 receptor in cultured cells or tissue samples may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York. Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein may also be used within a variety of well known cell separation methods.
  • modulators may be linked to the interior surface of a tissue culture plate or other support, for use as affinity ligands for immobilizing and thereby isolating, H3 receptors (e.g., isolating receptor-expressing cells) in vitro.
  • a modulator linked to a fluorescent marker such as fluorescein, is contacted with the cells, which are then analyzed (or isolated) by fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS).
  • FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
  • Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein may further be used within assays for the identification of other agents that bind to H3 receptor.
  • assays are standard competition binding assays, in which bound, labeled piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta- carboline or related analogue is displaced by a test compound.
  • such assays are performed by: (a) contacting H3 receptor with a radiolabeled piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue as described herein, under conditions that permit binding of the piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue to H3 receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue with a test agent; (d)
  • Mass spectroscopy data in this and the following Examples is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode using a Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT (Micromass, Beverly MA), equipped with a Waters 600 pump (Waters Corp., Milford, MA), Waters 996 photodiode array detector, Gilson 215 autosampler (Gilson, Inc. Middleton, WI), and a Gilson 841 micro injector. MassLynx (Advanced Chemistry Development, Inc; Toronto, Canada) version 4.0 software with OpenLynx processing is used for data collection and analysis.
  • Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT Micromass, Beverly MA
  • Waters 600 pump Waters Corp., Milford, MA
  • Gilson 215 autosampler Gilson, Inc. Middleton, WI
  • Gilson 841 micro injector MassLynx (Advanced Chemistry Development, Inc; Toronto, Canada) version 4.0 software with OpenLynx processing is used for data collection and analysis.
  • Sample volume of 1 microliter is injected onto a 50x4.6mm Chromolith SpeedROD RP-18e column (Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany), and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at 6mL/min flow rate. Sample is detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340nm UV range.
  • the elution conditions are: Mobile Phase A- 95/5/0.05 Water/MeOH/TFA; Mobile Phase B-5/95/0.025 Water/MeOH/TFA.
  • the following gradient is used, with an inject to inject cycle of 2.2 min: 0-0.5 minutes 10-100% B, hold at 100%B to 1.2 minutes, return to 10%B at 1.21 minutes.
  • Step 3 7-[2-(4-Cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-5,6,7,8- tetrahydropyrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrido[4,3-d]pyrimidine
  • the mixture is cooled to rt and partitioned between EtOAc (50 mL) and IN NaOH (50 mL).
  • the mixture is extracted with EtOAc (2 x 50 mL).
  • the combined organic extracts are placed directly on an SCX ion exchange resin and washed first with EtOAc/MeOH (95:5) to waste and second with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (90:10:10) collected and evaporated.
  • the residue is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (90:10:10) to yield the title compound.
  • Step 1 1 -Methyl- 1 H-pyrro Io [2,3 -b]pyridine-3-carbaldehyde
  • POCl 3 (1.48 mL, 9.65 mmol) is added dropwise to a 0 0 C solution of DMF (5 mL). The mixture is stirred 0.5 h at 0 0 C.
  • 1 -methyl- IH- pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (Journal of the American Chemical Society (2005) 127(22):8050-57; 1.04 g, 7.87 mmol) is dissolved in DMF (10 mL) and added dropwise to the first solution at 0 0 C. The mixture is allowed to warm to rt and stirred overnight. The mixture is diluted with water (100 mL) and basified with IO N NaOH.
  • Step 5 7-[2-(4-Cyclobutylpiperazin-l -yl)-2-oxoethyl]-9-methyl-6,7,8,9-tetrahydro- 5H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine
  • Step 4 l-(4-Cyclobutyl-piperazin-l-yl)-2-(l,2-dihydro-4H-3,8a,9-triaza-fluoren-3- yl)-ethanone
  • Step 3 7-[2-(4-Cyclobutyl-piperazin-l-yl)-2-oxo-ethyl]-3-methyl-5,6,7,8- tetrahydro-3H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-one
  • Step 4 l-(4-Cyclobutyl-piperazin-l-yl)-2-(5,8-dihydro-6H- pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-ethanone
  • Step 5 1 -(4-Cyclobutyl-piperazin- 1 -yl)-2-(2-methyl-5,8-dihydro-6H- pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-ethanone
  • Chimeric H3 receptor cDNA from human H3 receptor is generated from three cDNA fragments: (1) a human H3 receptor cDNA 5' fragment; (2) a human H3 receptor cDNA 3' fragment; and (3) a rat Ga ⁇ cDNA fragment, each containing appropriate, overlapping linker sequences, as described in Example 1 of US Patent Application Serial Number 11/355,711, which published as US 2006/0188960, and is hereby incorporated by reference for its teaching of the preparation of a chimeric human H3 receptor-rat Ga ⁇ baculoviral expression construct that has the sequence provided in SEQ ID NO:7 of US 2006/0188960, and encodes a polypeptide that has the sequence provided in SEQ ID NO:8 of US 2006/0188960.
  • the chimeric human H3 receptor-rat Ga ⁇ baculoviral expression vector is co- transfected along with BACULOGOLD DNA (BD PHARMINGEN, San Diego, CA) into S/9 cells.
  • BACULOGOLD DNA BD PHARMINGEN, San Diego, CA
  • the S/9 cell culture supernatant is harvested three days post- transfection.
  • the recombinant virus-containing supernatant is serially diluted in
  • insect medium heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum
  • recombinant plaques are selected and harvested into 1 ml of insect medium for amplification.
  • Each 1 ml volume of recombinant baculovirus (at passage 0) is used to infect a separate T25 flask containing 2 x 10 6 S/9 cells in 5 ml of insect medium.
  • supernatant medium is harvested from each of the T25 infections for use as passage 1 inoculum.
  • Two of seven recombinant baculoviral clones are chosen for a second round of amplification, using 1 ml of passage 1 stock to infect 1 x 10 8 cells in 100 ml of insect medium divided into two T 175 flasks. Forty-eight hours post infection, passage 2 medium from each 100 ml prep is harvested and plaque assayed to determine virus titer. The cell pellets from the second round of amplification are assayed by affinity binding as described below to verify recombinant receptor expression. A third round of amplification is then initiated using a multiplicity of infection of 0.1 to infect a liter of S/9 cells. Forty hours post-infection, the supernatant medium is harvested to yield passage 3 baculoviral stock. The remaining cell pellet is assayed for affinity binding using the protocol of
  • Radioligand ranges from 0.40 - 40 nM [ 3 H]-N-(a)methylhistamine (Perkin Elmer, Boston, MA) and assay buffer contains 50 mM Tris, 1 mM CaCl 2 , 5 mM MgCl 2 , 0.1% BSA, 0.1 mM bacitracin, and 100 KlU/ml aprotinin, pH 7.4.
  • Filtration is carried out using GF/C WHATMAN filters (presoaked in 1.0% polyethyeneimine for 2 hr prior to use). Filters are washed three times with 5 ml cold assay buffer without BSA, bacitracin, or aprotinin and air dried for 12-16 hr. Radioactivity retained on filters is measured on a beta scintillation counter.
  • Titer of the passage 3 baculoviral stock is determined by plaque assay and a multiplicity of infection, incubation time course, binding assay experiment is carried out to determine conditions for optimal receptor expression.
  • a multiplicity of infection of 0.5 and a 72-hr incubation period are preferred infection parameters for chimeric human H3 receptor-rat Ga ⁇ expression in up to 1 -liter S/9 cell infection cultures.
  • Log-phase S/9 cells are infected with one or more stocks of recombinant baculovirus followed by culturing in insect medium at 27 0 C. Infections are carried out with virus directing the expression of human H3 receptor-rat G(Xi2 in combination with three G-protein subunit-expression virus stocks: 1) rat Ga ⁇ G- protein-encoding virus stock (BIOSIGNAL #V5J008), 2) bovine ⁇ l G-protein- encoding virus stock (BIOSIGNAL #V5H012), and 3) human ⁇ 2 G-protein-encoding virus stock (BIOSIGNAL #V6B003), which may be obtained from BIOSIGNAL Inc., Montreal.
  • the infections are conveniently carried out at a multiplicity of infection of 0.5:1.0:0.5:0.5.
  • an aliquot of cell suspension is analyzed for viability by trypan blue dye exclusion. If no blue is detected by visual inspection, the S/9 cells are harvested via centrifugation (3000 rpm / 10 min / 4 0 C).
  • S/9 cell pellets obtained as described in Example 5 are resuspended in homogenization buffer (10 mM HEPES, 250 mM sucrose, 0.5 ⁇ g/ml leupeptin, 2 ⁇ g/ml Aprotinin, 200 ⁇ M PMSF, and 2.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.4) and homogenized using a POLYTRON PTl 0-35 homogenizer (KINEMATICA AG, Lucerne,
  • the homogenate is centrifuged (536 x g/ 10 min at 4 0 C) to pellet the nuclei and unbroken cells.
  • the supernatant containing the membranes is decanted to a clean centrifuge tube, centrifuged (48,000 x g/ 30 min, 4 0 C) and the resulting pellet resuspended in 30 ml homogenization buffer. This centrifugation and resuspension step is repeated twice.
  • the final pellet is resuspended in ice cold Dulbecco's PBS containing 5 mM EDTA and stored in frozen aliquots at - 8O 0 C until used for radioligand binding or functional response assays.
  • P2 membranes The protein concentration of the resulting membrane preparation (hereinafter termed "P2 membranes") is conveniently measured using a Bradford protein assay (BIO-RAD LABORATORIES, Hercules, CA). By this measure, a 1 -liter culture of cells typically yields 100-150 mg of total membrane protein.
  • This Example illustrates a representative assay for evaluating agonist- stimulated GTP-gamma 35 S binding ("GTP binding") activity.
  • GTP binding activity can be used to identify H3 antagonists and to differentiate neutral antagonist compounds from those that possess inverse agonist activity.
  • This agonist-stimulated GTP binding activity can also be used to detect partial agonism mediated by antagonist compounds.
  • a compound analyzed in this assay is referred to herein as a "test compound.”
  • Four independent baculoviral stocks one directing the expression of the chimeric human H3 receptor and three directing the expression of each of the three subunits of a heterotrimeric G-protein are used to infect a culture of Sfi cells as described above.
  • P2 membranes are prepared as described above, and agonist- stimulated GTP binding on the P2 membranes is assessed using histamine (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) as agonist in order to ascertain that the receptor/G- protein-alpha-beta-gamma combination(s) yield a functional response as measured by GTP binding.
  • histamine Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO
  • P2 membranes are resuspended by Dounce homogenization (tight pestle) in GTP binding assay buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl 2 , 2 mM EGTA, 1 mg/ml BSA, 0.2 mg/ml bacitracin, 0.02 mg/ml aprotinin, 0.01 mg/ml saponin, 10 ⁇ M GDP) and added to assay tubes at a concentration of 35 ⁇ g protein/reaction tube.
  • GTP binding assay buffer 50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl 2 , 2 mM EGTA, 1 mg/ml BSA, 0.2 mg/ml bacitracin, 0.02 mg/ml aprotinin, 0.01 mg/ml saponin, 10 ⁇ M GDP
  • GTP-gamma 35 S is determined by measuring the filter-bound radioactivity, preferably by liquid scintillation spectrometry of the washed filters.
  • Non-specific binding is determined in parallel assays including 10 ⁇ M unlabeled GTP-gammaS and typically
  • the data is analyzed as follows. First, the average bound radioactivity from negative control wells (no agonist) is subtracted from the bound radioactivity detected for each of the other experimental wells. Second, average bound radioactivity is calculated for the positive control wells (agonist wells). Then, percent inhibition for each compound tested is calculated using the equation: r. ⁇ T 1 .- U V 1 AA 1 AA Bound radioactivity in Test Wells
  • Percent Inhibition 100 - 100 r — ⁇ , — j- .. ⁇ / . — : r ⁇ — -,
  • the % inhibition data is plotted as a function of test compound concentration and test compound IC50 is determined using a linear regression in which x is ln(concentration of test compound) and y is ln(percent inhibition/(100 - percent inhibition). Data with a percent inhibition that is greater than 90% or less than 15% are rejected and are not used in the regression.
  • the IC50 is
  • K 1 ICso/(l + [L]/ECso) is used, where [L] is the histamine concentration in the GTP binding assay, and EC 50 is the concentration of histamine producing a 50% response, as determined by a dose-response analysis using concentrations of histamine ranging from 10 ⁇ 10 M to ICT 6 M.
  • this assay is performed in the absence of added histamine, and EC50 values are determined by analogous calculations, where the EC50 is the concentration of test compound producing a 50% response.
  • This Example illustrates a representative screening assay for evaluating inhibition of histamine-stimulated GTP-gamma 35 S binding.
  • GTP binding activity can be used to identify H3 antagonists and inverse agonists.
  • a compound analyzed in this assay is referred to herein as a "test compound,” and the initial identification of antagonists and inverse agonists is performed using a test compound concentration of 4 ⁇ M.
  • baculoviral stocks one directing the expression of the chimeric human H3 receptor and three directing the expression of each of the three subunits of a heterotrimeric G-protein are used to infect a culture of Sfi cells as described above.
  • P2 membranes are prepared as described above, and are resuspended by Dounce homogenization (tight pestle) in GTP binding assay buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl 2 , 2 mM EGTA, 1 mg/ml BSA, 0.2 mg/ml bacitracin, 0.02 mg/ml aprotinin, 0.01 mg/ml saponin, 10 ⁇ M GDP) and added to assay tubes at a concentration of 35 ⁇ g protein/reaction tube.
  • Non-radio labeled test compounds are added to separate reactions at a concentration of 4 ⁇ M along with 1 ⁇ M histamine (agonist).
  • Reactions are initiated by the addition of 125 pM GTP- gamma 35 S with a final assay volume of 0.20 ml. After a 60-min incubation at room temperature, reactions are terminated by vacuum filtration over GF/C filters (pre-soaked in 50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 12OmM NaCl plus 0.1% BSA) followed by washing with ice-cold buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 12OmM NaCl). The amount of receptor-bound (and thereby membrane-bound) GTP- gamma 35 S is determined by measuring the bound radioactivity, preferably by liquid scintillation spectrometry of the washed filters. Non-specific binding is determined using 10 uM GTP-gammaS and typically represents less than 5 percent of total binding. After subtraction of non-specific binding, data is expressed as percent inhibition of 1 ⁇ M histamine signal.
  • Neutral antagonists are those test compounds that reduce the histamine- stimulated GTP binding activity towards, but not below, baseline levels. In contrast, in the absence of added histamine, inverse agonists reduce the GTP binding activity of the receptor-containing membranes below baseline. Any test compound that elevates GTP binding activity above baseline in the absence of added histamine in this assay is defined as having agonist activity.

Abstract

Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of the formula (I): are provided, as are methods for their preparation and use. Such compounds may generally be used to modulate ligand binding to histamine H3 receptors in vivo or in vitro, and are particularly useful in the treatment of a variety of disorders in humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock animals. Pharmaceutical compositions and therapeutic methods are provided, as are methods for using such ligands for detecting histamine H3 receptors (e.g., receptor localization studies).

Description

PIPERAZINYL OXOALKYL TETRAHYDRO-BETA-CARBOLINES AND RELATED ANALOGUES
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/945,959 filed June 25, 2007, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
This invention relates generally to piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta- carbolines and related analogues, and to the use of such compounds for treating conditions responsive to histamine H3 receptor modulation. The invention further relates to the use of such compounds as probes for the detection and localization of histamine H3 receptors.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Hormones and neurotransmitters regulate a wide variety of biological functions, often via specific receptor proteins located on the surface of living cells. Many of these receptors carry out intracellular signaling via the activation of coupled guanosine triphosphate-binding proteins (G proteins); such receptors are collectively called G protein-coupled receptors or GPCRs. The important role of GPCRs in the regulation of cell and organ function has attracted attention to these receptors as targets for new pharmaceutical agents.
Histamine is a multifunctional chemical transmitter that signals through specific cell surface GPCRs. To date, four histamine receptor subtypes have been identified: Hl, H2, H3 and H4. Histamine H3 receptor is a presynaptic GPCR that is found primarily in the central nervous system, although lower levels are also found in the peripheral nervous system. Genes encoding the H3 receptor have been reported in various organisms, including humans (see Lovenberg et al. (1999) Molecular Pharmacology 55: 1101-07), and alternative splicing of this gene appears to result in multiple isoforms. The histamine H3 receptor is an auto- and hetero-receptor whose activation leads to a decreased release of neurotransmitters (including histamine, acetylcholine, norepinephrine and glutamate) from neurons in the brain. Histamine H3 receptor is involved in the regulation of processes such as sleep and wakefulness, feeding and memory.
Antagonists of histamine H3 receptor increase synthesis and release of cerebral histamine and other neurotransmitters, inducing an extended wakefulness, an improvement in cognitive processes, a reduction in food intake and a normalization of vestibular reflexes. Such antagonists are useful, for example, as therapeutics for central nervous system disorders such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, schizophrenia, mood and attention alterations including attention deficit hyperactivity disorder and attention deficit disorder, memory and learning disorders, cognitive disorders (such as mild cognitive impairment and cognitive deficits in psychiatric pathologies), epilepsy, migraine, and disorders associated with the regulation of sleep and wakefulness, as well as in the treatment and prevention of conditions such as obesity, eating disorders, diabetes, vertigo, motion sickness and allergic rhinitis.
Accordingly, there is a need for new H3 receptor modulators. The present invention fulfills this need, and provides further related advantages.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
In certain aspects, the present invention provides piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula I:
Formula I
Figure imgf000003_0001
including the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates) and esters thereof.
Within Formula I: Y is C or N;
Figure imgf000003_0002
represents a 5- or 6-membered optionally substituted heteroaryl that is fused to
the ring represented by
Figure imgf000003_0003
and is also fused to the ring represented by
^2^— (-\)m Y N
Figure imgf000004_0001
represents phenyl or a 5 -or 6-membered heteroaryl that is fused to the ring
represented by
Figure imgf000004_0002
, each of which phenyl or heteroaryl is optionally substituted and preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) hydrogen, amino, halogen, cyano, hydroxy, nitro and oxo; and
(ii) Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, C1- Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkylsulfonyl, mono-or di- (Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C4alkyl, phenylCo-C2alkyl or (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)Co-C2alkyl; each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with oxo, Ci-C6alkyl or Ci-C6alkoxy; n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; m is 0, 1 or 2; o is 1 or 2;
R2 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl (e.g., C2- Cealkyl or C3-C6alkyl), C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl,
Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; R4 and R5 are:
(i) independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, C2-Cealkynyl, Ci- Cβhaloalkyl and C2-Cealkyl ether; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, cyano, oxo, mono- or di-(Ci-
C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, and 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; such that at least one Of R4 and R5 is substituted with a nitrogen- containing heterocycle or an amine; or
(ii) taken together to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-
Cβalkenyl, C2-Cealkynyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-
C2alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-
Csalkylene bridge; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci- Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C?cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
Within certain aspects, piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein are H3 receptor modulators that exhibit a K1 at a histamine H3 receptor, preferably a human H3 receptor, that is no greater than 4 micromolar, 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar, as determined using an assay for H3 receptor GTP binding.
Within certain aspects, piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated).
The present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue as provided herein in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
Within further aspects, methods are provided for modulating H3 receptor activity, comprising contacting a cell (e.g., neuronal) expressing H3 receptor with at least one H3 receptor modulator as described herein. Such contact may occur in vivo or in vitro and is generally performed using a concentration of compound that is sufficient to alter H3 receptor GTP binding in vitro (e.g., using the assay provided in Example 7, herein).
The present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to H3 receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one H3 receptor modulator. Such conditions include, for example, attention deficit disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, dementia, schizophrenia, cognitive disorders (including mild cognitive impairment), epilepsy, migraine, excessive daytime sleepiness (EDS) and related disorders such as shift work disorder, fatigue and fatigue-related disorders, jet lag, narcolepsy, sleep apnea, allergic rhinitis, vertigo, motion sickness, memory disorders such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, obesity, eating disorders and diabetes.
Within further aspects, the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of H3 receptor in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a H3 receptor modulator as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the H3 receptor modulator to H3 receptor; and (b) detecting a level of the H3 modulator bound to H3 receptor.
The present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition as described herein in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat one or more conditions responsive to H3 receptor modulation, such as the conditions recited herein.
In yet another aspect, the present invention provides methods of preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates. These and other aspects of the present invention will become apparent upon reference to the following detailed description.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
As noted above, the present invention provides piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues. Such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo, to modulate H3 receptor activity in a variety of contexts.
TERMINOLOGY
Compounds are generally described herein using standard nomenclature. For compounds having asymmetric centers, it should be understood that (unless otherwise specified) all of the optical isomers and mixtures thereof are encompassed. In addition, compounds with carbon-carbon double bonds may occur in Z- and E- forms, with all isomeric forms of the compounds being included in the present invention unless otherwise specified. Where a compound exists in various tautomeric forms, a recited compound is not limited to any one specific tautomer, but rather is intended to encompass all tautomeric forms. Certain compounds are described herein using a general formula that includes variables (e.g., Ri, Z, etc.). Unless otherwise specified, each variable within such a formula is defined independently of any other variable, and any variable that occurs more than one time in a formula is defined independently at each occurrence.
The phrase "piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues," as used herein, encompasses all compounds of Formula I, including any enantiomers, racemates and stereoisomers, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates) and esters of such compounds. A "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity or carcinogenicity, and preferably without irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication. Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids. Specific pharmaceutically acceptable anions for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to, acetate, 2- acetoxybenzoate, ascorbate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bromide, calcium edetate, carbonate, chloride, citrate, dihydrochloride, diphosphate, ditartrate, edetate, estolate (ethylsuccinate), formate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycolate, glycollylarsanilate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydroxymaleate, hydroxynaphthoate, iodide, isethionate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, maleate, mandelate, methylbromide, methylnitrate, methylsulfate, mucate, napsylate, nitrate, pamoate, pantothenate, phenylacetate, phosphate, polygalacturonate, propionate, salicylate, stearate, subacetate, succinate, sulfamate, sulfanilate, sulfate, sulfonates including besylate (benzenesulfonate), camsylate (camphorsulfonate), edisylate (ethane- 1,2-disulfonate), esylate (ethanesulfonate) 2-hydroxyethylsulfonate, mesylate (methanesulfonate), triflate (trifluoromethanesulfonate) and tosylate (p-toluenesulfonate), tannate, tartrate, teoclate and triethiodide. Similarly, pharmaceutically acceptable cations for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to ammonium, benzathine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine, procaine, and metals such as aluminum, calcium, lithium, magnesium, potassium, sodium and zinc. Those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize further pharmaceutically acceptable salts for the compounds provided herein. In general, a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method. Briefly, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
It will be apparent that each compound provided herein may, but need not, be formulated as a solvate (e.g., hydrate), ester or non-covalent complex. In addition, the various crystal forms and polymorphs are within the scope of the present invention. Also provided herein are prodrugs of the compounds of the recited Formulas. A "prodrug" is a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound a formula provided herein. For example, a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of a compound as provided herein. Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, esters such as acetate, formate and benzoate derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within the compounds provided herein. Prodrugs of the compounds provided herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved in vivo to yield the parent compounds. As used herein, the term "alkyl" refers to a straight or branched chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon. Alkyl groups include groups having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (Ci-Cgalkyl), from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (Ci-Cβalkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (Ci-C4alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-bvXyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl and 3-methylpentyl. The term "alkylene" refers to a divalent alkyl group, which may be straight or branched. Ci-C4alkylene is an alkylene group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms. "Co- C4alkyl" or "Co-C4alkylene" is a single covalent bond (Co) or an alkylene group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
"Alkenyl" refers to straight or branched chain alkene groups, which comprise at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyl groups include C2- Csalkenyl, C2-C6alkenyl and C2-C4alkenyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively, such as ethenyl, allyl or isopropenyl. "Alkynyl" refers to straight or branched chain alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond. Alkynyl groups include C2-C8alkynyl, C2-Cealkynyl and C2-C4alkynyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
A "cycloalkyl" is a group that comprises one or more saturated and/or partially saturated rings in which all ring members are carbon, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, adamantyl, decahydro-naphthalenyl, octahydro-indenyl, and partially saturated variants of the foregoing, such as cyclohexenyl. Cycloalkyl groups do not comprise an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring. A "(C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl" is a Cs-Cgcycloalkyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a methylene or ethylene group; C3-C7cycloalkyl is a directly linked
3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl.
By "alkoxy," as used herein, is meant an alkyl group attached via an oxygen bridge. "Ci-Cβalkoxy" has from 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the alkyl portion of the group.
Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2-pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3- methylpentoxy are representative alkoxy groups. Similarly, "alkylthio" refers to an alkyl group attached via a sulfur bridge.
The term "oxo" is used herein to refer to an oxygen substituent of a carbon atom that results in the formation of a carbonyl group (C=O). An oxo group that is a substituent of a nonaromatic carbon atom results in a conversion of -CH2- to -C(=O)-.
An oxo group that is a substituent of an aromatic carbon atom results in a conversion of
-CH- to -C(=O)- and may result in a loss of aromatic ity.
The term "alkanoyl" refers to an acyl group (e.g., -(C=O)-alkyl), in which carbon atoms are in a linear or branched alkyl arrangement and where attachment is through the carbon of the keto group. Alkanoyl groups have the indicated number of carbon atoms, with the carbon of the keto group being included in the numbered carbon atoms. For example a C2alkanoyl group is an acetyl group having the formula
-(C=O)CH3; "Cialkanoyl" refers to -(C=O)H. "Ci-C6alkanoyl groups" contain from 1 to 6 carbon atoms. An "alkanone" is a ketone group in which carbon atoms are in a linear or branched alkyl arrangement. "Cs-Cβalkanone" refers to an alkanone having from 3 to
6 carbon atoms, respectively. By way of example, a C3 alkanone group has the structure -CH2-(C=O)-CH3.
Similarly, "alkyl ether" refers to a linear or branched ether substituent (i.e., an alkyl group that is substituted with an alkoxy group). A C2 alkyl ether has the structure -CH2-O-CHs; A C2-C6alkyl ether has a total of 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 carbon atoms. The term "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to an alkoxy group attached through a keto
(-(C=O)-) bridge (i.e., an alkoxycarbonyl group has the general structure -C(=O)-O- alkyl). "Cialkoxycarbonyl" refers to -C(=O)-O-CH3; C3alkoxycarbonyl indicates - C(=O)-O-(CH2)2CH3 or -C(=O)-O-(CH)(CH3)2 (i.e., the carbon of the keto bridge is not included in the indicated number of carbon atoms). "Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl" groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the alkyl portion of the group. "Alkylsulfonyl" refers to groups of the formula -(Sθ2)-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. "Ci-Cealkylsulfonyl" has from 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the alkyl group.
The term "aminocarbonyl" refers to an amide group (i.e., -(C=O)NH2). The term "mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl" refers to groups of the formula - (C=O)-N(R)2, in which the carbonyl is the point of attachment, one R is Ci-Cβalkyl and the other R is hydrogen or an independently chosen Ci-Cβalkyl.
"Alkylamino" refers to a secondary or tertiary amine that has the general structure -NH-alkyl or -N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups. Such groups include, for example, mono- and di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino groups, in which each Ci-Cβalkyl may be the same or different.
"Alkylaminoalkyl" refers to an alkylamino group linked via an alkylene group (i.e., a group having the general structure -alkylene-NH-alkyl or -alkylene- N(alkyl)(alkyl)) in which each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups. Alkylaminoalkyl groups include, for example, mono- and di-(Ci-C8alkyl)aminoCi-C8alkyl, mono- and di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCi-C6alkyl and mono- and di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCi-C4alkyl. "Mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo- C2alkyl" refers to a mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino group linked via a single covalent bond or a methylene or ethylene group. The following are representative alkylaminoalkyl groups:
Figure imgf000010_0001
It will be apparent that the definition of "alkyl" as used in the terms "alkylamino" and "alkylaminoalkyl" differs from the definition of "alkyl" used for all other alkyl- containing groups, in the inclusion of cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups (e.g., (C3-C7CyC loalkyl)Co-C6alkyl).
The term "halogen" refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine. A "haloalkyl" is an alkyl group that is substituted with 1 or more halogen atoms (e.g., "Ci-Cβhaloalkyl" groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms). Examples of haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono- , di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-l-trifluoromethyl-ethyl. Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl. The term "haloalkoxy" refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above attached via an oxygen bridge. "Ci- Cβhaloalkoxy" groups have 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
A dash ("-") that is not between two letters or symbols is used to indicate a point of attachment for a substituent. For example, -CONH2 is attached through the carbon atom.
A "carbocycle" or "carbocyclic group" comprises at least one ring formed entirely by carbon-carbon bonds (referred to herein as a carbocyclic ring), and does not contain a heterocycle. Certain representative carbocycles are cycloalkyl as described above. Other carbocycles are aryl (i.e., contain at least one aromatic ring). PhenylCo-C2alkyl is a phenyl, benzyl or phenethyl moiety.
A "heterocycle" or "heterocyclic group" has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings (and typically from 3 to 15 ring members in total), at least one of which is a heterocyclic ring (i.e., one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom independently chosen from O, S and N, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon). Additional rings, if present, may be heterocyclic or carbocyclic. Typically, a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocyclic ring has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring. Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments) and certain heterocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings contain from 9 to 14 ring members. Certain heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO2. Heterocycles may be optionally substituted with a variety of substituents, as indicated. Unless otherwise specified, a heterocycle may be a heterocycloalkyl group (i.e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated) or a heteroaryl group (i.e., at least one ring within the group is aromatic), and may be linked via any ring atom, provided that a stable compound results. Heterocyclic groups include, for example, acridinyl, azepanyl, azocinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzimidazolinyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzotriazolylcarbazolyl, benztetrazolyl, NH-carbazolyl, carbolinyl, chromanyl, chromenyl, cinnolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, dihydrofuro[2,3-b]tetrahydrofuran, dihydroisoquinolinyl, dihydrotetrahydrofuranyl, l,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]dec-8-yl, dithiazinyl, furanyl, furazanyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolyl, indazolyl, indolenyl, indolinyl, indolizinyl, indolyl, isobenzo furanyl, isochromanyl, isoindazolyl, isoindolinyl, isoindolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isoquinolinyl, morpholinyl, naphthyridinyl, octahydro isoquinolinyl, oxadiazolyl, oxazolidinyl, oxazolyl, phenanthridinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxathiinyl, phenoxazinyl, phthalazinyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, piperidinyl, piperidonyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, pyranyl, pyrazinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyridoimidazolyl, pyridooxazolyl, pyridothiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolidonyl, pyrrolinyl, pyrrolyl, quinazolinyl, quinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinuclidinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrazolyl, thiadiazinyl, thiadiazolyl, thianthrenyl, thiazolyl, thienothiazolyl, thienooxazolyl, thienoimidazolyl, thienyl, thiophenyl, thiomorpholinyl and variants thereof in which the sulfur atom is oxidized, triazinyl, xanthenyl and any of the foregoing that are substituted as described herein.
Certain heterocycles are 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl groups (e.g., pyridyl, pyrimidyl and pyridazinyl), each of which may be substituted as indicated. Other heterocycles are 4- to 8- membered heterocycloalkyl groups, which are saturated or partially saturated heterocycles as described above, containing 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 ring members. A "(4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl" is a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl group that is linked via a single covalent bond or a methylene or ethylene group.
A "substituent," as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest. For example, a "ring substituent" may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group discussed herein that is covalently bonded to an atom (preferably a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member. The term "substitution" refers to replacing one or more hydrogen atoms in a molecular structure with a substituent as described above, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution.
Groups that are "optionally substituted" are unsubstituted or substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different). Optional substitution is also indicated by the phrase "substituted with from 0 to X substituents," where X is the maximum number of permissible substituents. Certain optionally substituted groups are substituted with from 0 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents (i.e., are unsubstituted or substituted with up to the recited maximum number of substituents). Other optionally substituted groups are substituted with at least one substituent (e.g., substituted with from 1 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents).
Unless otherwise specified, the term "H3 receptor" is used herein to refer to any histamine H3 subtype receptor, including human H3 receptor (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 6,136,559), H3 receptor found in other mammals and chimeric receptors retaining H3 function, including the chimeric H3 receptor provided as SEQ ID NO:8 in US Patent Application Serial Number 11/355,711, which published as US 2006/0188960. A "H3 receptor modulator," also referred to herein as a "modulator," is a compound that modulates H3 receptor GTP binding. A H3 receptor modulator may be a H3 receptor agonist or antagonist. A modulator binds with "high affinity" if the K1 at H3 receptor is less than 4 micromolar, preferably less than 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar. A representative assay for evaluating an effect on H3 receptor GTP binding is provided in Example 7, herein. Unless otherwise specified, the terms "IC50" and "EC50," as used herein, refer to values obtained using the assay as described in Example 7.
A modulator is considered an "antagonist" if it detectably inhibits H3 receptor agonist-stimulated GTP binding (using, for example, the representative assay provided in Example 7); in general, such an antagonist inhibits such GTP binding with a IC50 value of less than 4 micromolar, preferably less than 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar. H3 receptor antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists. An "inverse agonist" of H3 receptor is a compound that reduces the GTP binding activity of H3 receptor below its basal activity level in the absence of added agonist. Inverse agonists of H3 receptor may also inhibit the activity in the presence of agonist. The basal activity of H3 receptor, as well as the reduction in H3 receptor GTP binding activity due to the presence of H3 receptor antagonist, may be determined using the assay of Example 7.
A "neutral antagonist" of H3 receptor is a compound that inhibits the activity of H3 receptor agonist, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within the assay of Example 7 performed in the absence of agonist, H3 receptor activity is reduced by no more than 10%, preferably by no more than 5%, and more preferably by no more than 2%; most preferably, there is no detectable reduction in activity). The basal activity is the level of GTP binding observed in the assay in the absence of added histamine or any other agonist, and in the further absence of any test compound. Neutral antagonists of H3 receptor may, but need not, inhibit the binding of agonist to H3 receptor.
As used herein a "H3 receptor agonist" is a compound that elevates the activity of the receptor above the basal activity level of the receptor. H3 receptor agonist activity may be identified using the representative assay provided in Example 7. In general, such an agonist has an EC50 value of less than 4 micromolar, preferably less than 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar within the assay provided in Example 7. If the GTP binding activity brought about by a test compound attains the same level to that of histamine, it is defined as a full agonist. If the level of GTP binding activity brought about by a test compound is above baseline but below the level attained by histamine, it is defined as a partial agonist. Preferred antagonists do not elevate GTP binding activity under such conditions more than 10% above baseline, preferably not more than 5% above baseline, and most preferably not more than 2% above baseline.
A "therapeutically effective amount" (or dose) is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, results in a discernible patient benefit (e.g., provides detectable relief from a condition being treated). Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including alleviation of one or more symptoms characteristic of the condition. A therapeutically effective amount or dose generally results in a concentration of compound in a body fluid (such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine) that is sufficient to alter H3 receptor GTP binding in vitro. It will be apparent that the discernible patient benefit may be apparent after administration of a single dose, or may become apparent following repeated administration of the therapeutically effective dose according to a predetermined regimen, depending upon the indication for which the compound is administered.
A "patient" is any individual treated with a piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro- beta-carboline or related analogue provided herein. Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock. Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to H3 receptor modulation, or may be free of such symptom(s) (e.g., treatment may be prophylactic).
PIPERAZINYL OXOALKYL TETRAHYDRO-BETA-CARBOLINES AND RELATED ANALOGUES As noted above, the present invention provides piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula I:
Formula I
Figure imgf000015_0001
in which variables are as described above.
Within certain aspects, such compounds are H3 receptor modulators that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the therapeutic treatment of human and animal patients as discussed below. H3 receptor modulators may also be used within in vitro assays (e.g., assays for receptor activity), and as probes for detection and localization of H3 receptor.
Certain piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula I further satisfy Formula Ia:
Formula Ia
Figure imgf000015_0002
in which: p is 1, 2 or 3; Re represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci- Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; R7 is Ci-Cealkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-Cgcycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, phenylCo-C2alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, Cs-Czcycloalkyl and A- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and the remaining variables are as described for Formula I.
Other piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula I further satisfy Formula Ib:
Formula Ib
Figure imgf000016_0001
in which: p is 0, 1, 2 or 3;
Rβ is as described for Formula Ia;
Rg is mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C2alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy,
Ci-C6haloalkoxy, Ci-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-C6alkanoyl, C3- Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di- (Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and the remaining variables are as described for Formula I.
Further piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula I further satisfy Formula Ic or Formula Id:
Figure imgf000017_0001
Formula Ic Formula Id in which p is 0, 1, 2 or 3; Re and R7 are as described for Formula Ia; q is 1, 2 or 3; and the remaining variables are as described for Formula I.
Certain piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula I further satisfy Formula II:
Formula II
Figure imgf000017_0002
or are a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof.
Within Formula II:
A, B, D and E are independently N or CRi; such that
Figure imgf000017_0003
is aromatic;
W, X and Y are independently C or N; Z is CR9, N, NR3, S or O; n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; m is 0, 1 or 2; o is 1 or 2; Each Ri is independently:
(i) hydrogen, amino, halogen, cyano, hydroxy, nitro or oxo; or (ii) Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8CyC loalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, Ci-
Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkylsulfonyl, mono-or di- (Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C4alkyl, phenylCo-C2alkyl or (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)Co-C2alkyl; each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with oxo, Ci-Cβalkyl or Ci-Cβalkoxy; R2 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from C2-Cealkyl, C2- Cβalkenyl, C2-Cealkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; R3 is hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C2-C6aminoalkyl, or mono-or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoC2-C6alkyl; R4 and R5 are:
(i) independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci- Cβhaloalkyl and C2-Cealkyl ether; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, cyano, oxo, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, and 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; such that at least one Of R4 and R5 is substituted with a nitrogen- containing heterocycle or an amine; or (ii) taken together to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2- Cβalkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo- C2alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci- Csalkylene bridge; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci- Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, Cs-Czcycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and
R9 is hydrogen, amino, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, C2- Cβalkyl ether, Ci-Cβaminoalkyl, or mono-or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C6alkyl.
Certain piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula II further satisfy Formula Ha:
Formula Ha
Figure imgf000018_0001
in which p, R^ and R7 are as described for Formula Ia; and the remaining variables are as described for Formula II.
Other piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula II further satisfy Formula lib: Formula lib
Figure imgf000019_0001
in which p, R6 and Rg are as described for Formula Ib; and the remaining variables are as described for Formula II.
Further piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula II further satisfy Formula Hc or Formula Hd:
Figure imgf000019_0002
Formula Hc Formula Hd in which p, R6 and R7 are as described for Formula Ha; q is 1, 2 or 3; and the remaining variables are as described for Formula II.
Certain piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula I, Formula II and the various subformulas thereof further satisfy one or more of the following: (i) W and Y are carbon, and Z is oxygen or sulfur.
(ii) X, W and Y are carbon, and Z is nitrogen or NR3. (iii) X and W are carbon, Y is nitrogen, and Z is nitrogen or NR3. (iv) X and W are carbon; Y is nitrogen; and Z is CR3. (v) W is carbon, and exactly one of A, B, D and E is nitrogen. (vi) W is carbon, A is nitrogen, and exactly one of B, D and E is nitrogen,
(vii) A, B, D and E are independently chosen from CRi. (viii) A is carbon; and exactly two of B, D and E are nitrogen. Still further piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula II further satisfy one of the following Formulas, in which variables are generally as described above:
Figure imgf000019_0003
Formula He Formula Hf
Figure imgf000020_0001
Formula Hg
Within certain embodiments of Formulas I, II and subformulas thereof: A, B, D and E (B, D and E in the case of Formula Hg) are independently nitrogen or
CRi; such that exactly zero, one or two of A, B, D and E are nitrogen; Re represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl and Ci- Cβhaloalkyl; and
R7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Cs-Cβalkyl.
Within certain embodiments of Formulas I, II and Ha-IIe, Z is oxygen, sulfur or NR3. Within certain embodiments of Formulas I, II, Ha-IId, Hf and Hg, Z is nitrogen or CR3. Within certain embodiments of Formulas I, II and subformulas thereof each Ri is independently chosen from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl.
Certain piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula I further satisfy Formula III:
Formula III
Figure imgf000020_0002
or are a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester thereof. Within Formula III:
G, J and K are independently nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or CRi; Q and T are independently carbon or nitrogen; P and U are independently CR3 or nitrogen; n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; m is 0, 1 or 2; 0 is 1 or 2; Each Ri is independently:
(i) hydrogen, amino, halogen, cyano, hydroxy, nitro or oxo; or (ii) Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, Ci-
Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkylsulfonyl, mono-or di-
(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C4alkyl, phenylCo-C2alkyl or (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)Co-C2alkyl; each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with oxo, Ci-Cβalkyl, or Ci-Cβalkoxy;
R2 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2- Cβalkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge;
R3 is hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C2-C6aminoalkyl, or mono-or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoC2-C6alkyl;
R4 and R5 are:
(i) independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci- Cβhaloalkyl and C2-Cealkyl ether; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, cyano, oxo, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, and 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; such that at least one Of R4 and R5 is substituted with a nitrogen- containing heterocycle or an amine; or
(ii) taken together to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2- Cβalkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-
C2alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci- Csalkylene bridge; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-
Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl. Certain piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula III further satisfy Formula Ilia:
Formula Ilia
Figure imgf000022_0001
in which p is 1, 2 or 3, and Re and R7 are as described for Formula Ia.
Other piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula III further satisfy Formula HIb:
Formula IIIb
Figure imgf000022_0002
in which p is 0, 1, 2 or 3; and R^ and Rs are as described for Formula Ib.
Further piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula III satisfy Formula IIIc or Formula IHd:
Figure imgf000022_0003
Formula IIIc Formula Md in which p is 0, 1, 2 or 3 ; and R^ and R7 are as described for Formula Ilia. Within certain compounds of Formula III and the sub formulas thereof, one or more of the following conditions is met:
(a) Q and U are nitrogen; T is carbon; and P is CH.
(b) P and T are nitrogen; Q is carbon; and U is CH.
(c) G is nitrogen; and J and K are CH. (d) K is nitrogen; and J and G are CH. Still further piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues of Formula III satisfy Formula IHe or Formula IHf:
Figure imgf000023_0001
Formula Me Formula Mf wherein G, J and K are independently nitrogen or CRi; such that exactly zero, one or two of G, J and K are nitrogen; R5 represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl and Ci-Cβhaloalkyl; and R7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Cs-Cβalkyl.
Within certain compounds of Formula I, II or III:
Figure imgf000023_0002
in which R5, R6 and R7 are as described above and Rio and Rn are independently chosen from: (i) hydrogen; and (ii) Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, C2-Cealkynyl, (C3- C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, and groups that are taken together to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with any group consistent with Formula I. In certain such compounds, Rβ represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci- Cβalkyl and Ci-Cβhaloalkyl; and R7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Cs-Cβalkyl; in further such compounds, R5 is hydrogen or Ci-Cβalkyl; and Rio and Rn are independently chosen from: (i) hydrogen; and (ii) Ci-Cβalkyl, C2- Cβalkenyl, C2-Cealkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, and groups that are taken together to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, cyano, Ci- C4alkyl mono- or di-(Ci-C4alkyl)amino.
Representative piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein include, but are not limited to, those specifically described in Examples 1-3. It will be apparent that the specific compounds recited herein are representative only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Further, as noted above, all compounds of the present invention may be present as a free acid or base or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester. In certain aspects, piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein are H3 receptor modulators, as determined using an assay for H3 receptor GTP binding. References herein to an "assay for H3 receptor GTP binding" are intended to refer to the in vitro GTP binding assay provided in Example 7, which may be performed in the presence or absence of added agonist. Briefly, to assess H3 receptor agonist-stimulated GTP binding, a H3 receptor preparation is incubated with a H3 receptor agonist (e.g., histamine or an analogue thereof such as R-alpha-methyhistamine), labeled (e.g., 35S) GTP and unlabeled test compound. Within the assays provided herein, the H3 receptor used is preferably mammalian H3 receptor (e.g., human or rat H3 receptor, and preferably human H3 receptor), and more preferably a chimeric human H3 receptor such as a receptor having the sequence provided in SEQ ID NO:8. The H3 receptor may be recombinantly expressed or naturally expressed. The H3 receptor preparation may be, for example, a membrane preparation from cells that recombinantly express H3 receptor. Incubation with a H3 receptor modulator results in a decrease or increase in the amount of label bound to the H3 receptor preparation, relative to the amount of label bound in the absence of the compound.
As noted above, piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues that are H3 receptor antagonists are preferred within certain embodiments. When agonist-contacted cells are contacted with a piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro- beta-carboline or related analogue that is a H3 receptor antagonist, the response is preferably reduced by at least 20%, more preferably at least 50% and still more preferably at least 80%, as compared to cells that are contacted with the agonist in the absence of the piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue. The IC50 for H3 receptor antagonists provided herein is preferably less than 4 micromolar, less than 1 micromolar, less than 50OnM, less than 100 nM, less than 50 nM or less than 10 nM. In certain embodiments, H3 receptor antagonists provided herein exhibit no detectable agonist activity in the assay of Example 7 at a concentration of compound equal to the IC50. Certain preferred antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity in the assay at a concentration of the antagonist that is 100- fold higher than the IC50.
In certain embodiments, preferred H3 receptor modulators provided herein are non-sedating. In other words, a dose of H3 receptor modulator that is twice the minimum therapeutically effective dose causes only transient (i.e., lasting for no more than 1A the time that the therapeutic effect lasts) or preferably no statistically significant sedation in an animal model assay of sedation (using the method described by Fitzgerald et al. (1988) Toxicology 49(2-3):433-9). Preferably, a dose that is any of 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 times the minimum therapeutically effective dose does not produce statistically significant sedation. More preferably, a H3 receptor modulator does not produce sedation at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg (preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg).
If desired, H3 receptor modulators provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective concentrations of the compound at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, and still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred H3 receptor modulator is nontoxic when a therapeutically effective amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred H3 receptor modulator produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred H3 receptor modulator exhibits an in vivo half-life allowing for Q. LD. dosing, preferably T. LD. dosing, more preferably B. LD. dosing, and most preferably once-a-day dosing). In addition, differential penetration of the blood brain barrier may be desirable for certain H3 receptor modulators. Routine assays that are well known in the art may be used to assess these properties, and identify superior compounds for a particular use. For example, assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, such as Caco-2 cell monolayers. Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously). Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays or whole serum binding assays. In vitro half-lives of compounds may be predicted from assays of microsomal half-life as described within Example 8 of PCT Publication Number WO 06/089076.
As noted above, preferred piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues are nontoxic. In general, the term "nontoxic" as used herein shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration ("FDA") for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans). In addition, a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, or (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes.
As used herein, a compound that does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 9 of PCT Publication Number WO 06/089076. In other words, cells treated as described in Example 9 therein with 100 μM of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
A compound that does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound, hi certain preferred embodiments, a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals. By "statistically significant" is meant results varying from control at the p<0.1 level or more preferably at the p<0.05 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
A compound does not cause substantial liver enlargement if daily treatment of laboratory rodents (e.g., mice or rats) for 5-10 days with a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound results in an increase in liver to body weight ratio that is no more than 100% over matched controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not cause liver enlargement of more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. If non-rodent mammals (e.g., dogs) are used, such doses should not result in an increase of liver to body weight ratio of more than 50%, preferably not more than 25%, and more preferably not more than 10% over matched untreated controls. Preferred doses within such assays include 0.01, 0.05. 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally.
Similarly, a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if administration of twice the minimum dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory rodents by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. Alternatively, a H3 receptor modulator does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) that are equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound do not cause detectable release of any such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, there is no detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels when such compound concentrations are five-fold, and preferably ten-fold the EC50 or IC50 for the compound.
In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not substantially inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYP 1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound.
Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal the EC50 or IC50 for the compound. In other embodiments, certain preferred H3 receptor modulators do not induce sister chromatid exchange (e.g., in Chinese hamster ovary cells) at such concentrations. For detection purposes, as discussed in more detail below, piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled. For example, one or more atoms may be replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2H, 3H, 11C, 13C, 14C, 15N, 18O, 17O, 31P, 32P, 35S, 18F and 36Cl. In addition, substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2H) can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
PREPARATION OF PIPERAZINYL OXOALKYL TETRAHYDRO-BETA-CARBOLINES AND
RELATED ANALOGUES Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein may generally be prepared using standard synthetic methods.
Starting materials illustrated in the schemes and in the examples are commercially available from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich Corp. (St. Louis, MO), or may be synthesized from commercially available precursors using established protocols. By way of example, a synthetic route similar to that shown in any of the following
Schemes may be used, together with synthetic methods known in the art of synthetic organic chemistry, or variations thereon as appreciated by those skilled in the art.
Each variable in the following schemes refers to any group consistent with the description of the piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein.
Certain abbreviations used in the following Schemes and elsewhere herein are:
BOC tert-butyl carboxyl
BOP benzotriazol- 1 -yl-oxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate
Bu butyl
CDCl3 deuterated chloroform δ chemical shift
DCM dichloromethane DMA dimethyl acetal
DMC 2-chloro-l,3-dimethylimidazolinium chloride
DMF dimethylformamide dppf 1 , 1 '-Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene EtOAc ethyl acetate
Et ethyl
EtOH ethanol
Eq. equivalent(s)
1H NMR proton nuclear magnetic resonance HPLC high pressure liquid chromatography h hour(s)
Hz hertz
LCMS liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry
MS mass spectrometry (M+ 1) mass + 1
Me methyl
MeOH methanol
MsCl methanesulfonyl chloride min minute(s) Pd2(dba)3 tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0)
Pd(PPli3)4 tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0)
PG protecting group, such as BOC or a benzyl group
PPI13 triphenylphosphine
PTLC preparative thin layer chromatography rt room temperature
TEA triethylamine
TfO trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy
Tf2θ trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride
THF tetrahydrofuran Xantphos 9,9-dimethyl-4,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)xanthene Scheme 1
Figure imgf000030_0001
Scheme 1 illustrates the preparation of compounds 5. Cyclic amine 2 is reacted with halogen substituted acylchloride 1 in the presence of a base such as sodium bicarbonate to afford halogen substituted carboxamide 3, which is treated with tetrahydro-lH-beta-carbolines or related amine analogue 4 in the presence of a base such as potassium carbonate to produce 5.
Scheme 2
Figure imgf000030_0002
Scheme 2 illustrates the preparation of compounds 10. Condensation of 6 with 5-aminopyrazole 7 provides 8, which is then converted to amine 9 upon deprotection. Alkylation of 9 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 10. Scheme 3
Figure imgf000031_0001
Scheme 3 illustrates the preparation of compounds 14. Condensation of 11 with 5-aminopyrazole 7 provides 12, which is then converted to amine 13 upon deprotection. Alkylation of 13 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 14.
Scheme 4
Figure imgf000031_0002
Compounds 20 are prepared in accordance with Scheme 4, in which "R" represents from 0 to 4 ring substituents indicated as Ri in certain Formulas herein. Starting from any of a variety of commercially available tryptamines 15, 2,3,4,9- tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline 16 is prepared using established literature procedures (e.g., Organic Syntheses (1971) 51 : 136-38; and Journal of Labeled Compounds & Radiopharmaceuticals (2005) 48(5):323-30). Alternatively, the synthesis may be started with a commercially available 2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline 16. Direct alkylation of 16 with carboxamide 3 forms 20. Protection of secondary amine forms 17, which can be alkylated directly by an alkylhalide or arylated by a Buchwald reaction to form 18. Deprotection of 18 forms 19 and alkylation with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 20.
Scheme 5
Suzuki, Nigishi Stille
Figure imgf000032_0002
Figure imgf000032_0001
Scheme 5 illustrates the preparation of biaryl (R = aryl or heteroaryl) and cyano (R = CN) analogues 22, in which "R" represents from 0 to 4 ring substituents indicated as Ri in certain Formulas. The appropriately substituted bromo-2,3,4,9- tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline 21 is converted to 22 (R = aryl or heteroaryl) by palladium-catalyzed coupling, such as Suzuki coupling, Nigishi coupling or Stille coupling. Cyano-analogue 22 (R = CN) is made by a Nigishi reaction using Zn(CN)2.
Scheme 6
Figure imgf000032_0003
Scheme 6 illustrates the preparation of amide analogues 25. Compound 19 is alkylated with t-butyl bromoacetate to form 23. After refluxing in 4N HCl dioxane, deprotection of the t-butyl ester forms carboxylic acid 24, which is transformed into amide 25 upon coupling with an appropriate amine in the presence of a coupling reagent such as DMC or BOP. Scheme 7
Figure imgf000033_0001
Scheme 7 illustrates the preparation of azaindole analogues 36 and 36'. Compound 28 is formed by a Fisher indole reaction between 26 and 27 (Annali di Chimica (Rome, Italy) (1965) 55(12): 1223-32 and Farmaco, Edizione Scientifica (1964) 19(9):741-50). Amide reduction forms 29 and subsequent deprotection yields 33. Alternatively, compound 33 can be formed from carbaldehyde 30. Condensation between 30 and nitromethane yields nitroalkene 31. Reduction to the azatryptamine 32 followed by a Pictet-Spangler cyclization yields 33. A third method for producing 33 is to start from azaindole 34 and perform a Friedel-Crafts alkylation with ethyl oxalyl chloride to form the oxalate ester, which is immediately treated with NH3 in MeOH to form amide 35 (see Journal of Organic Chemistry (2002) 67(17):6226-27; PCT International Application Publication Number WO 2006/061212 and US Patent Application Publication Number 2004-0192718). Reduction of the amide forms 32 which is cyclized using a Pictet-Spangler cyclization to yield 33. Alkylation with carboxamide 3 or a related diamine under standard alkylation conditions provides 36 and 36'. Scheme 8
Figure imgf000034_0001
Scheme 8 illustrates the preparation of indole analogues 41. Compound 38 is formed by a Fisher indole reaction between 26 and 37 (Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry (2006) 43(3):571-78). Deprotection of 38 yields 40. The nitrogen of indole 38 can be alkylated directly with an alkyl-halide or arylated by a Buchwald reaction to form indole 39. Deprotection of 39 forms amine 40. Alternatively, a number of 2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-pyrido[4,3-b]indoles are commercially available (e.g., from AKos Consulting and Solutions GmbH). Alkylation of 40 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 41.
Scheme 9
Figure imgf000034_0002
Scheme 9 illustrates the preparation of compounds 46. Starting from the appropriately substituted indole 42, alkylation with chloroacetonitrile forms 43. Either direct reduction with LiAlH4 to form 45 or stepwise reduction of the nitrile and cyclization to form 44 followed by reduction forms 45 (see Guandalini et al., Archive for Organic Chemistry (ARCHIVOC) 2004(v):286-300 and Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2004) 14(4): 1003-05). Alkylation of 45 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 46. Scheme 10
Figure imgf000035_0001
Scheme 10 illustrates the method for preparing 51. Alcohol 46 is known in the literature (e.g., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. (2002) 20:2377-80) or conveniently prepared by a variety of methods familiar to those skilled in the art. Compound 46 is treated with methanesulfonyl chloride to give 47, which is converted to 48 upon treatment with sodium azide in DMF. The azido compound 48 is reduced by triphenylphosphine to give amine 49, which is transformed to 50 through a Pictet- Spengler cyclization. Alkylation of 50 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 51.
Scheme 11
Figure imgf000035_0002
Compounds 54 may be prepared in accordance with Scheme 11. Amine 52 is available from commercial sources such as Aldrich (St Louis, MO) or may be synthesized from commercially available precursors using established protocols or readily apparent variations thereon. Treatment of 52 with paraformaldehyde in formic acid under Pictet-Spengler cyclization conditions provides compound 53. Treatment of 53 with carboxamide 3 in the presence of a base such as potassium carbonate produces compound 54. Scheme 12
Figure imgf000036_0001
Scheme 12 illustrates the preparation of compounds 57, 60 and 62. The tricyclic intermediate 55 is commercially available, known in the literature (e.g., Ach. Mod. Chem. (1994) 131 :489-98) or conveniently prepared by a variety of methods. Treatment of compound 55 with an alkyl halide in acetonitrile followed by deprotection gives pyrimidone 56. Alkylation of 56 with carboxamide 3 under standard alkylation conditions provides 57. Compound 55 can also be converted to chloride compound 58 upon treatment with phosphorous oxychloride in the presence of a base such as pyridine at 100 0C; hydrogenation of compound 58 in the presence of palladium on charcoal provides compound 59, which is transformed to compound 60 upon deprotection followed by a standard alkylation reaction with carboxamide 3. Compound 58 is heated with sodium methoxide in methanol to give intermediate 61, which upon deprotection and reaction with 3 is converted to compound 62. In certain embodiments, a piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue provided herein may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms, so that the compound can exist in different stereoisomeric forms. Such forms can be, for example, racemates or optically active forms. As noted above, all stereoisomers are encompassed by the present invention. Nonetheless, it may be desirable to obtain single enantiomers (i.e., optically active forms). Standard methods for preparing single enantiomers include asymmetric synthesis and resolution of the racemates. Resolution of the racemates can be accomplished, for example, by conventional methods such as crystallization in the presence of a resolving agent, or chromatography using, for example a chiral HPLC column.
Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope. Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14C), hydrogen (e.g., 3H), sulfur (e.g., 35S) or iodine (e.g., 125I). Tritium-labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum-catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous- catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate. In addition, certain precursors may be subjected to tritium-halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate. Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds.
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogues provided herein, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient. Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, water, buffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans), mannitol, proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives. Preferred pharmaceutical compositions are formulated for oral delivery to humans or other animals (e.g., companion animals such as dogs or cats). In addition, other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, inhalation (e.g., nasal or oral), topical, oral, nasal, rectal or parenteral administration. The term parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique. In certain embodiments, compositions in a form suitable for oral use are preferred. Such forms include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs. Within yet other embodiments, compositions of the present invention may be formulated as a lyophilizate.
Compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations. Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets. Such excipients include, for example, inert diluents to increase the bulk weight of the material to be tableted (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents that modify the disintegration rate in the environment of use (e.g., corn starch, starch derivatives, alginic acid and salts of carboxymethylcellulose), binding agents that impart cohesive qualities to the powdered material(s) (e.g., starch, gelatin, acacia and sugars such as sucrose, glucose, dextrose and lactose) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, stearic acid or talc). Tablets may be formed using standard techniques, including dry granulation, direct compression and wet granulation. The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques.
Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil).
Aqueous suspensions comprise the active material(s) in admixture with one or more suitable excipients, such as suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally-occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monooleate). Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredients in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin. The oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations. Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid. Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, such as sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present.
Pharmaceutical compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions. The oily phase may be a vegetable oil (e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil (e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof. Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums (e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally- occurring phosphatides (e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides (e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoleate). An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents. Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents. A pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension. The active ingredient(s), depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle. Such a composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectable compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
Pharmaceutical compositions may also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration). Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non- irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the body temperature and will therefore melt in the body to release the drug. Suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
Compositions for inhalation typically can be provided in the form of a solution, suspension or emulsion that can be administered as a dry powder or in the form of an aerosol using a conventional propellant (e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane).
Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated for release at a predetermined rate. Instantaneous release may be achieved, for example, via sublingual administration (i.e., administration by mouth in such a way that the active ingredient(s) are rapidly absorbed via the blood vessels under the tongue rather than via the digestive tract). Controlled release formulations (i.e., formulations such as a capsule, tablet or coated tablet that slows and/or delays release of active ingredient(s) following administration) may be administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at a target site. In general, a controlled release formulation comprises a matrix and/or coating that delays disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract (or implantation site) and thereby provides a delayed action or a sustained action over a longer period. One type of controlled- release formulation is a sustained-release formulation, in which at least one active ingredient is continuously released over a period of time at a constant rate. Preferably, the therapeutic agent is released at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations are maintained within the therapeutic range, but below toxic levels, over a period of time that is at least 4 hours, preferably at least 8 hours, and more preferably at least 12 hours. Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site. Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release. The amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
Controlled release may be achieved by combining the active ingredient(s) with a matrix material that itself alters release rate and/or through the use of a controlled- release coating. The release rate can be varied using methods well known in the art, including (a) varying the thickness or composition of coating, (b) altering the amount or manner of addition of plasticizer in a coating, (c) including additional ingredients, such as release-modifying agents, (d) altering the composition, particle size or particle shape of the matrix, and (e) providing one or more passageways through the coating. The amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the method of administration (e.g., the site of implantation), the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented. The matrix material, which itself may or may not serve a controlled-release function, is generally any material that supports the active ingredient(s). For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed. Active ingredient(s) may be combined with matrix material prior to formation of the dosage form (e.g., a tablet). Alternatively, or in addition, active ingredient(s) may be coated on the surface of a particle, granule, sphere, microsphere, bead or pellet that comprises the matrix material. Such coating may be achieved by conventional means, such as by dissolving the active ingredient(s) in water or other suitable solvent and spraying. Optionally, additional ingredients are added prior to coating (e.g., to assist binding of the active ingredient(s) to the matrix material or to color the solution). The matrix may then be coated with a barrier agent prior to application of controlled-release coating. Multiple coated matrix units may, if desired, be encapsulated to generate the final dosage form. In certain embodiments, a controlled release is achieved through the use of a controlled release coating (i.e., a coating that permits release of active ingredient(s) at a controlled rate in aqueous medium). The controlled release coating should be a strong, continuous film that is smooth, capable of supporting pigments and other additives, non-toxic, inert and tack-free. Coatings that regulate release of the modulator include pH- independent coatings, pH-dependent coatings (which may be used to release modulator in the stomach) and enteric coatings (which allow the formulation to pass intact through the stomach and into the small intestine, where the coating dissolves and the contents are absorbed by the body). It will be apparent that multiple coatings may be employed (e.g., to allow release of a portion of the dose in the stomach and a portion further along the gastrointestinal tract). For example, a portion of active ingredient(s) may be coated over an enteric coating, and thereby released in the stomach, while the remainder of active ingredient(s) in the matrix core is protected by the enteric coating and released further down the GI tract. pH dependent coatings include, for example, shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid ester copolymers and zein.
In certain embodiments, the coating is a hydrophobic material, preferably used in an amount effective to slow the hydration of the gelling agent following administration. Suitable hydrophobic materials include alkyl celluloses (e.g., ethylcellulose or carboxymethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, acrylic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxy ethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid alkamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polyacrylamide, ammonio methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride) and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers) and mixtures of the foregoing. Representative aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose include, for example, AQUACOAT® (FMC Corp., Philadelphia, PA) and SURELEASE® (Colorcon, Inc., West Point, PA), both of which can be applied to the substrate according to the manufacturer's instructions. Representative acrylic polymers include, for example, the various EUDRAGIT® (Rohm America, Piscataway, NJ) polymers, which may be used singly or in combination depending on the desired release profile, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
The physical properties of coatings that comprise an aqueous dispersion of a hydrophobic material may be improved by the addition or one or more plasticizers. Suitable plasticizers for alkyl celluloses include, for example, dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate and triacetin. Suitable plasticizers for acrylic polymers include, for example, citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate and tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil and triacetin.
Controlled-release coatings are generally applied using conventional techniques, such as by spraying in the form of an aqueous dispersion. If desired, the coating may comprise pores or channels or to facilitate release of active ingredient. Pores and channels may be generated by well known methods, including the addition of organic or inorganic material that is dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use. Certain such pore-forming materials include hydrophilic polymers, such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses (e.g., hydroxypropylmethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, synthetic water-soluble polymers (e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone, cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone and polyethylene oxide), water-soluble polydextrose, saccharides and polysaccharides and alkali metal salts. Alternatively, or in addition, a controlled release coating may include one or more orifices, which may be formed my methods such as those described in US Patent Nos. 3,845,770; 4,034,758; 4,077,407; 4,088,864; 4,783,337 and 5,071,607. Controlled-release may also be achieved through the use of transdermal patches, using conventional technology (see, e.g., US Patent No. 4,668,232).
Further examples of controlled release formulations, and components thereof, may be found, for example, in US Patent Nos. 4,572,833; 4,587,117; 4,606,909; 4,610,870; 4,684,516; 4,777,049; 4,994,276; 4,996,058; 5,128,143; 5,202,128; 5,376,384; 5,384,133; 5,445,829; 5,510,119; 5,618,560; 5,643,604; 5,891,474; 5,958,456; 6,039,980; 6,143,353; 6,126,969; 6,156,342; 6,197,347; 6,387,394; 6,399,096; 6,437,000; 6,447,796; 6,475,493; 6,491,950; 6,524,615; 6,838,094; 6,905,709; 6,923,984; 6,923,988; and 6,911,217.
In addition to, or together with, the above modes of administration, a piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue provided herein may be conveniently added to food or drinking water (e.g., for administration to non- human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock). Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water.
Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein are generally present within a pharmaceutical composition at levels providing a therapeutically effective amount upon administration, as described above. Dosage forms providing dosage levels ranging from about 0.1 mg to about 140 mg per kilogram of body weight per day are preferred (about 0.5 mg to about 7 g per human patient per day). The amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated and the particular mode of administration. Dosage unit forms generally contain between from about 0.1 mg to about 2 g, preferably 0.5 mg to 1 g, and more preferably 1 mg to 500 mg, of an active ingredient. It will be understood, however, that the optimal dose for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, including the activity of the specific compound employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time and route of administration; the rate of excretion; any simultaneous treatment, such as a drug combination; and the type and severity of the particular disease undergoing treatment. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing and procedures that are well known in the art.
Pharmaceutical compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to H3 receptor modulation, including those specifically recited herein.
Packaged pharmaceutical preparations comprise a container holding one or more dosage units comprising a therapeutically effective amount of at least one H3 receptor modulator as described herein and instructions (e.g., labeling) indicating that the contained composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to H3 receptor modulation in the patient. METHODS OF USE
H3 receptor modulators provided herein may be used to alter activity and/or activation of H3 receptors in a variety of contexts, both in vitro and in vivo. Within certain aspects, H3 receptor modulators may be used to inhibit or enhance (preferably to inhibit) H3 receptor activity in vitro or in vivo. In general, such methods comprise the step of contacting a H3 receptor with one or more H3 receptor modulators provided herein, in aqueous solution and under conditions otherwise suitable for binding of the modulator(s) to H3 receptor. The H3 receptor modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter H3 receptor GTP binding activity in vitro (using the assay provided in Example 7). The H3 receptor may be present in solution or suspension (e.g., in an isolated membrane or cell preparation), or in a cultured or isolated cell. Within certain embodiments, the H3 receptor is present in a patient (e.g., expressed by a neuronal cell), and the aqueous solution is a body fluid. Preferably, one or more H3 receptor modulators are administered to a patient in an amount such that each H3 receptor modulator is present in at least one body fluid of the patient at a therapeutically effective concentration that is 1 micromolar or less; preferably 500 nanomolar or less; more preferably 100 nanomolar or less, 50 nanomolar or less, 20 nanomolar or less, or 10 nanomolar or less. For example, such compounds may be administered at a dose that is less than 20 mg/kg body weight, preferably less than 5 mg/kg and, in some instances, less than 1 mg/kg. In vivo, modulation of H3 receptor activity may be assessed by detecting an alteration of a symptom (e.g., memory or attention) in a patient being treated with one or more H3 receptor modulators provided herein.
The present invention further provides methods for treating conditions responsive to H3 receptor modulation. Within the context of the present invention, the term "treatment" encompasses both disease-modifying treatment and symptomatic treatment, either of which may be prophylactic (i.e., before the onset of symptoms, in order to prevent, delay or reduce the severity of symptoms) or therapeutic (i.e., after the onset of symptoms, in order to reduce the severity and/or duration of symptoms). A condition is "responsive to H3 receptor modulation" if it is characterized by inappropriate activity of H3 receptor, regardless of the amount of H3 receptor ligand present locally, and/or if modulation of H3 receptor activity results in alleviation of the condition or a symptom thereof. Such conditions may be diagnosed and monitored using criteria that have been established in the art. Patients may include humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock, with dosages as described above.
Conditions that are responsive to H3 receptor modulation include, for example:
Cardiovascular disorders, including atherosclerosis, hypertension, myocardial infarction, coronary heart disease and stroke; Cancer (e.g., endometrial, breast, prostate and colon cancer, cutaneous carcinoma, medullary thyroid carcinoma and melanoma); Metabolic disorders including impaired glucose tolerance, dyslipidaemia, and diabetes
(e.g., non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus); Immune conditions and disorders including osteoarthritis, allergy (e.g., allergic rhinitis), and inflammation;
Respiratory conditions including nasal congestion, upper airway allergic response, asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease;
Disorders associated with the regulation of sleep and wakefulness, or arousal and vigilance, including excessive daytime sleepiness (EDS), shift work disorder, narcolepsy, jet lag, and sleep disorders such as primary insomnia, idiopathic hypersomnia, circadian rhythm sleep disorder, dyssomnia NOS, parasomnias including nightmare disorder, sleep terror disorder, sleep disorders secondary to depression, anxiety and/or other mental disorders and sub stance- induced sleep disorder;
Fatigue and fatigue-related disorders such as sleep/fatigue disorders, sleep impairment due to perimenopausal hormonal shifts, Parkinson's-related fatigue, multiple sclerosis-related fatigue, and chemotherapy-induced fatigue;
Eating disorders (e.g., bulimia, binge eating and anorexia) and obesity; Digestive system and gastrointestinal disorders including gallbladder disease, ulcer, hyper- and hypo-motility of the gastrointestinal tract and irritable bowel syndrome; CNS disorders including hyper- and hypo-activity of the central nervous system, migraine, epilepsy, seizures, convulsions, mood disorders, attention deficit disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, bipolar disorder, depression, manic disorders, obsessive compulsive disorder, schizophrenia, migraine, vertigo, motion sickness, dementia, cognitive deficit (e.g., in psychiatric disorder, such as mild cognitive impairment), learning deficit, memory deficit (e.g., age-related memory dysfunction), multiple sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease and other neurodegenerative disorders, addiction (e.g., resulting from drug abuse), neurogenic inflammation and Tourette's syndrome;
Vestibular dysfunction (e.g., Meniere's disease, dizziness and motion sickness); Pain (e.g., inflammatory pain or neuropathic pain) and itch; Septic shock; and Glaucoma. H3 receptor modulators may further be used to enhance a patient's cognitive ability.
In certain embodiments, piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein are used to treat Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, schizophrenia, mood and attention alterations including attention deficit hyperactivity disorder and attention deficit disorder, memory and learning disorders, cognitive disorders (such as mild cognitive impairment and cognitive deficits in psychiatric pathologies), epilepsy, migraine, and disorders associated with the regulation of sleep and wakefulness, as well as in the treatment and prevention of conditions such as obesity, eating disorders, diabetes, vertigo, motion sickness and allergic rhinitis. Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated. However, for treatment of most disorders, a frequency of administration of 4 times daily or less is preferred, hi general, a dosage regimen of 2 times daily is more preferred, with once a day dosing particularly preferred. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy. In general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented.
Within other aspects, H3 receptor modulators provided herein may be used within combination therapy for the treatment of conditions that are responsive to H3 receptor modulation, as described above. Alternately, such H3 modulators may be used in combination with drugs that are associated with induction of sleepiness as an adverse effect, so as to limit induction of sleepiness. Within such combination therapy, a H3 receptor modulator is administered to a patient along with a second therapeutic agent that is not a H3 receptor modulator. The H3 receptor modulator and second therapeutic agent may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order. It will be apparent that additional therapeutic agents may, but need not, also be administered.
Second therapeutic agents suitable for use in such combination therapy include, for example, antiobesity agents, antidiabetics, antihypertensive agents, antidepressants, antipsychotic agents and anti-inflammatory agents. In certain combinations, the second therapeutic agent is a compound for the treatment of attention deficit disorder or attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, an antipsychotic agent or an anti-obesity agent. Histamine Hl receptor modulators represent one class of second therapeutic agents. Combination with Hl receptor modulators may be used, for example, in the treatment of Alzheimer's disease, inflammatory diseases and allergic conditions. Representative Hl receptor antagonists include, for example, loratadine, desloratadine, fexofenadine and cetirizine. Other Hl receptor antagonists include ebastine, mizolastine, acrivastine, astemizole, azatadine, azelastine, brompheniramine, chlorpheniramine, clemastine, cyproheptadine, dexchlorpheniramine, diphenhydramine, hydroxyzine, levocabastine, promethazine and tripelenamine. Many of these agents are known to induce sleepiness as an adverse effect. Antiobesity therapeutic agents for use in combination therapy include, for example, leptin, leptin receptor agonists, melanin concentrating hormone (MCH) receptor antagonists, melanocortin receptor 3 (MC3) agonists, melanocortin receptor 4 (MC4) agonists, melanocyte stimulating hormone (MSH) agonists, cocaine and amphetamine regulated transcript (CART) agonists, dipeptidyl aminopeptidase inhibitors, a growth hormone secretagogue, beta-3 adrenergic agonists, 5HT-2 agonists, orexin antagonists, neuropeptide Yi or Y5 antagonists, tumor necrosis factor (TNF) agonists, galanin antagonists, urocortin agonists, cholecystokinin (CCK) agonists, GLP-I agonists, serotonin (5HT) agonists, bombesin agonists, CBl antagonists such as rimonabant, growth hormone, growth factors such as prolactin or placental lactogen, growth hormone releasing compounds, thyrotropin (TRH) agonists, uncoupling protein 2 or 3 (UCP 2 or 3) modulators, dopamine agonists (e.g., the partial D2 agonist aplindore), agents that modify lipid metabolism such as antilipidemic agents (e.g., cholestyramine, colestipol, clofibrate, gemfibrozil, lovastatin, pravastatin, simvastatin, probucol or dextrothyroxine), lipase/amylase inhibitors, peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPAR) modulators, retinoid X receptor (RXR) modulators, TR-beta agonists, agouti-related protein (AGRP) inhibitors, opioid antagonists such as naltrexone, exendin-4, GLP-I, ciliary neurotrophic factor, corticotropin-releasing factor binding protein (CRF BP) antagonists and/or corticotropin-releasing factor (CRF) agonists. Representative such agents include, for example, sibutramine, dexfenfluramine, dextroamphetamine, amphetamine, orlistat, mazindol, phentermine, phendimetrazine, diethylpropion, fluoxetine, bupropion, topiramate and ecopipam. Antihypertensive therapeutic agents for use in combination therapy include, for example, beta-blockers such as alprenolol, atenolol, timolol, pindolol, propranolol and metoprolol, angiotensin converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors such as benazepril, captopril, enalapril, fosinopril, lisinopril, quinapril and ramipril, calcium channel blockers such as nifedipine, felodipine, nicardipine, isradipine, nimodipine, diltiazem and verapamil, alpha-blockers such as doxazosin, urapidil, prazosin and terazosin, and angiotensin receptor blockers such as losartan.
CNS-active agents for use in combination therapy include, but are not limited to the following, many of which are know to induce sleepiness as an adverse effect: for anxiety, depression, mood disorders or schizophrenia - serotonin receptor (e.g., 5- HTIA) agonists and antagonists, neurokinin receptor antagonists, GABAergic agents, and corticotropin releasing factor receptor (CRFi) antagonists; for sleep disorders - melatonin receptor agonists; and for neurodegenerative disorders - such as Alzheimer's dementia, nicotinic agonists, muscarinic agents, acetylcholinesterase inhibitors and dopamine receptor agonists. For example, such combination therapy may include a selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) or a non-selective serotonin, dopamine and/or norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor. Such agents include, for example, fluoxetine, sertraline, paroxetine, amitriptyline, seroxat and citalopram. For cognitive disorders, representative agents for use in combination therapy include GABAergic agents.
Other therapeutic agents suitable for combination therapy include, for example, agents that modify cholinergic transmission (e.g., 5-HTβ antagonists), Ml muscarinic agonists, M2 muscarinic antagonists and acetylcholinesterase inhibitors.
Suitable doses for H3 receptor modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Doses and methods of administration of other therapeutic agents can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a H3 receptor modulator with the second therapeutic agent results in a reduction of the dosage of the second therapeutic agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (i.e., a decrease in the minimum therapeutically effective amount). Thus, preferably, the dosage of second therapeutic agent in a combination or combination treatment method is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the second therapeutic agent without combination administration of a H3 receptor modulator. More preferably this dosage is less than 3A, even more preferably less than 1A, and highly preferably, less than 1A of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for the second therapeutic agent when administered without combination administration of a H3 receptor modulator. It will be apparent that the dosage amount of H3 receptor modulator component(s) of the combination needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be affected by the dosage amount and potency of the other therapeutic component(s) of the combination.
In certain preferred embodiments, the combination administration of a H3 receptor modulator with other therapeutic agent(s) is accomplished by packaging one or more H3 receptor modulators and one or more other therapeutic agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same contained as a mixture of one or more H3 receptor modulators and one or more other therapeutic agents. Preferred mixtures are formulated for oral administration (e.g., as pills, capsules, tablets or the like). In certain embodiments, the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the one or more H3 receptor modulators and one or more other therapeutic agents are to be taken together for the treatment of attention deficit disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, schizophrenia, a cognitive disorder (such as mild cognitive impairment), epilepsy, migraine, a sleep disorder, excessive daytime sleepiness (EDS), shift work disorder, narcolepsy, allergic rhinitis, vertigo, motion sickness, a memory disorder such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, obesity, an eating disorder or diabetes. Within separate aspects, the present invention provides a variety of non- pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta- carbolines and related analogues provided herein. For example, such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of H3 receptor (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof). In addition, compounds provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group (such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group) may be used in photoaffinity labeling studies of receptor binding sites. Compounds provided herein may further be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity, as standards for determining the ability of a candidate agent to bind to H3 receptor, or as radiotracers for positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or for single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT). Such methods can be used to characterize H3 receptors in living subjects. For example, a piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques (e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and incubated with a sample for a suitable incubation time (e.g., determined by first assaying a time course of binding). Following incubation, unbound piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta- carboline or related analogue is removed (e.g., by washing), and bound piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue detected using any method suitable for the label employed (e.g., autoradiography or scintillation counting for radiolabeled compounds; spectroscopic methods may be used to detect luminescent groups and fluorescent groups). As a control, a matched sample containing labeled compound and a greater (e.g., 10-fold greater) amount of unlabeled compound maybe processed in the same manner. A greater amount of detectable label remaining in the test sample than in the control indicates the presence of H3 receptor in the sample. Detection assays, including receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of H3 receptor in cultured cells or tissue samples may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York. Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein may also be used within a variety of well known cell separation methods. For example, modulators may be linked to the interior surface of a tissue culture plate or other support, for use as affinity ligands for immobilizing and thereby isolating, H3 receptors (e.g., isolating receptor-expressing cells) in vitro. Within one preferred embodiment, a modulator linked to a fluorescent marker, such as fluorescein, is contacted with the cells, which are then analyzed (or isolated) by fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS).
Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues provided herein may further be used within assays for the identification of other agents that bind to H3 receptor. In general, such assays are standard competition binding assays, in which bound, labeled piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta- carboline or related analogue is displaced by a test compound. Briefly, such assays are performed by: (a) contacting H3 receptor with a radiolabeled piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue as described herein, under conditions that permit binding of the piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue to H3 receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carboline or related analogue in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b), and therefrom identifying an agent that binds to H3 receptor.
The following Examples are offered by way of illustration and not by way of limitation. Unless otherwise specified all reagents and solvent are of standard commercial grade and are used without further purification. Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein. EXAMPLES
Mass spectroscopy data in this and the following Examples is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode using a Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT (Micromass, Beverly MA), equipped with a Waters 600 pump (Waters Corp., Milford, MA), Waters 996 photodiode array detector, Gilson 215 autosampler (Gilson, Inc. Middleton, WI), and a Gilson 841 micro injector. MassLynx (Advanced Chemistry Development, Inc; Toronto, Canada) version 4.0 software with OpenLynx processing is used for data collection and analysis. MS conditions are as follows: capillary voltage = 3.5 kV; cone voltage = 30 V, desolvation and source temperature = 350 0C and 120 0C, respectively; mass range = 181-750 with a scan time of 0.22 seconds and an interscan delay of 0.05 min.
Sample volume of 1 microliter is injected onto a 50x4.6mm Chromolith SpeedROD RP-18e column (Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany), and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at 6mL/min flow rate. Sample is detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340nm UV range. The elution conditions are: Mobile Phase A- 95/5/0.05 Water/MeOH/TFA; Mobile Phase B-5/95/0.025 Water/MeOH/TFA. The following gradient is used, with an inject to inject cycle of 2.2 min: 0-0.5 minutes 10-100% B, hold at 100%B to 1.2 minutes, return to 10%B at 1.21 minutes.
EXAMPLE 1
Preparation of Representative Compounds
1. 7-[2-(4-CYCLOBUTYLPIPERAZIN- l-YL)-2-OXOETHYL]-5,6,7,8- TETRAHYDRO PYRAZOLO[1,5-A]PYRIDO[4,3-D]PYRIMIDINE (SCHEME 2)
Figure imgf000053_0001
Compound 1 Step 1. tert-Butyl 7,8-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrido[3,4-d]pyrimidine-6(5H)- carboxylate
Figure imgf000054_0001
To a solution of 3-dimethylaminomethylene-4-oxo-piperidine-l-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (775 mg, 3.05 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (10 mL) is added 5- aminopyrazole (253 mg, 3.05 mmol). The mixture is heated at 120 0C overnight. The mixture is cooled to RT and partitioned between Et2O (100 mL) and H2O (100 mL), followed by extraction with Et2O (2 x 100 mL). The organic extracts are combined, washed with water (100 mL) and brine (100 mL), dried and evaporated to give the crude product. MS (+VE) m/z 275.21 (M+ +1 ).
Step 2. 5,6,7,8-Tetrahydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrido[3,4-d]pyrimidine
Figure imgf000054_0002
tert-Butyl 7,8-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrido[3,4-d]pyrimidine-6(5H)- carboxylate (327 mg, 1.20 mmol) is dissolved in 4 N HCl in dioxane (5 mL) and stirred at rt for 4 h. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as its hydrochloride salt. MS (+VE) m/z 175.11 (M++l).
Step 3. 7-[2-(4-Cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-5,6,7,8- tetrahydropyrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrido[4,3-d]pyrimidine
Figure imgf000054_0003
To a solution of 5,6,7, 8-tetrahydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrido[3,4-d]pyrimidine hydrochloride (250 mg, 1.19 mmol) in acetonitrile (5 mL) is added NaI (50 mg, 0.333 mmol), K2Cθ3 (400 mg, 2.90 mmol) and l-(chloroacetyl)-4-cyclobutylpiperazine (257 mg, 1.19 mmol). The mixture is stirred overnight at rt. The mixture is diluted with DCM (25 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filtrate is concentrated and the residue is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (95:5:5) to yield the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.24 (IH, s), 8.11 (IH, d), 6.71 (IH, d), 3.81 (2H, s), 3.65-3.58 (4H, m), 3.50 (2H, s), 3.31 (2H, t), 3.04 (2H, t), 2.65 (IH, m), 2.36-2.30 (4H, m), 2.09-1.67 (m, 6H); MS (+VE) m/z 355.17 (M++l).
2. 6-[2-(4-CYCLOBUTYLPIPERAZIN- l-YL)-2-OXOETHYL]-5,6,7,8- TETRAHYDRO PYRAZOLO[1, 5-A]PYRIDO[3, 4-D]PYRIMIDINE (Scheme 3)
Figure imgf000055_0001
Compound 2
Step 1. tert-Butyl 7,8-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrido[3,4-d]pyrimidine-6(5H)- carboxylate
Figure imgf000055_0002
To a solution of tert-butyl-4-[(dimethylamino)methylene]-3-oxopiperidine-l- carboxylate (1.20 g, 4.22 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (10 mL) is added 5- aminopyrazole (509 g, 6.13 mmol) and K2CO3 (2.33 g, 16.9 mmol). The mixture is heated at 120 0C overnight. The mixture is cooled to rt, partitioned between Et2O (100 mL) and H2O (100 mL) and extracted with Et2O (2 x 100 mL). The organic extracts are combined, and washed with water (100 mL) and brine (100 mL). The organic extract is dried and evaporated to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 275.20 (M++l).
Step 2. 5,6,7, 8-Tetrahydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrido[3,4-d]pyrimidine
Figure imgf000055_0003
tert-Butyl 7,8-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrido[3,4-d]pyrimidine-6(5H)- carboxylate (140 mg, 0.51 mmol) is dissolved in TFA (5 mL) and stirred at rt for 3 h. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as its trifluoroacetic acid salt. MS (+VE) m/z 175.12 (M+ +l). Step 3. 6-[2-(4-Cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-5,6,7,8- tetrahydropyrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrido[3 ,4-d]pyrimidine
Figure imgf000056_0001
To a solution of 5,6,7, 8-tetrahydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrido[3,4-d]pyrimidine trifluoroacetate (146 mg, 0.51 mmol) in acetonitrile (5 mL) is added NaI (50 mg,
0.333 mmol), K2CO3 (750 mg, 5.42 mmol) and l-(chloroacetyl)-4- cyclobutylpiperazine (120 mg, 0.56 mmol). The mixture is stirred overnight at rt. The mixture is diluted with DCM (25 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filtrate is concentrated and the residue is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (90:10:5) to yield the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.09 (IH, s),
7.96 (IH, d), 6.59 (IH, d), 4.17 (2H, s), 3.64-3.57 (4H, m), 3.52 (2H, t), 3.49 (2H, s),
3.31 (2H, t), 2.65 (IH, m), 2.36-2.30 (4H, m), 2.07-1.65 (m, 6H); MS (+VE) m/z
355.15 (M++l).
3. 2-[2-(4-CYCLOBUTYLPIPERAZIN- 1 -YL)-2-OXOETHYL]-2,3,4,9- TETRAHYDRO- 1 H-BETA-CARBOLINE (SCHEME 4)
Figure imgf000056_0002
Compound 3
To a solution of 2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline (Aldrich; 150 mg, 0.87 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) is added NaI (50 mg, 0.333 mmol), K2CO3 (300 mg, 2.17 mmol) and l-(chloroacetyl)-4-cyclobutylpiperazine (226 mg, 1.05 mmol). The mixture is stirred overnight at rt. The mixture is diluted with DCM (25 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filtrate is concentrated and the residue is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (90:10:5) to yield the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.29 (IH, br ex s), 7.45 (IH, d), 7.30 (IH, d), 7.09 (2H, m), 3.75 (2H, s), 3.66-3.61 (4H, m), 3.43 (2H, s), 2.91 (2H, t), 2.80 (2H, t), 2.69 (IH, m), 2.29-2.28 (4H, m), 2.04-1.99 (2H, m), 1.89-1.83 (2H, m); 1.73-1.67 (2H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 353.14 (M++l). 4. 2-[2-(4-CYCLOBUTYLPIPERAZIN-l -YL)-2-OXOETHYL]-9-METHYL- 2,3,4,9-TETRAHYDRO-lH-BETA-CARBOLINE (SCHEME 4)
Figure imgf000057_0001
Compound 4 Step 1. tert-Butyl l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carboline-2-carboxylate
Figure imgf000057_0002
To a solution of 2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline (300 mg, 1.74 mmol) in THF (10 mL) and IN NaOH (2 mL) is added di-f-butyl dicarbonate (380 mg, 1.80 mmol). The mixture is stirred 3 h at rt. EtOAc (50 mL) is added and the mixture is extracted with IN NaOH (2 x 50 mL). The organic extract is dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated under reduced pressure to yield the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 273.25 (M+ +1).
Step 2. tert-Butyl 9-methyl-l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carboline-2-carboxylate
Figure imgf000057_0003
To a solution of tert-butyl l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carboline-2-carboxylate (337 mg, 1.24 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) is added NaH (60 %; 94 mg, 2.48 mmol). The mixture is stirred one half hour at rt. Iodomethane (0.115 mL, 1.86 mmol) is added and the mixture is allowed to stir 1 h. Water (50 mL) is added and the mixture is extracted with ether (2 x 50 mL). The combined organic extracts are washed with water (100 mL) and brine (100 mL), dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexane/EtOAc (6:1) to yield the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 287.27 (M+ +1).
Step 3. 9-Methyl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline
Figure imgf000057_0004
To a solution of tert-butyl 9-methyl-l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carboline-2- carboxylate (354 mg, 1.24 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) is added trifluoroacetic acid (5 mL). The mixture is stirred 2 h at rt. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as its trifluoroacetic acid salt. MS (+VE) m/z 287.27 (M+
Step 4. 2-[2-(4-Cyclobutylpiperazin- 1 -yl)-2-oxoethyl]-9-methyl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro- 1 H-beta-carboline
Figure imgf000058_0001
To a solution of 9-methyl-2, 3, 4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline trifluoroacetate (105 mg, 0.35 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) is added NaI (50 mg,
0.333 mmol), K2CO3 (400 mg, 2.89 mmol) and l-(chloroacetyl)-4- cyclobutylpiperazine (105 mg, 0.48 mmol). The mixture is stirred overnight at rt. The mixture is diluted with DCM (25 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filtrate is concentrated and the residue is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (90:10:5) to yield the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.47 (IH, d),
7.26 (IH, d), 7.17 (IH, t), 7.08 (IH, t), 3.77 (2H, s), 3.67-3.65 (4H, m), 3.59 (3H, s),
3.48 (2H, s), 2.91 (2H, t), 2.82 (2H, t), 2.68 (IH, m), 2.30-2.27 (4H, m), 2.04-1.98
(2H, m), 1.87-1.83 (2H, m); 1.72-1.67 (2H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 367.10 (M++l).
5. 2-[2-(4-CYCLOBUTYLPIPERAZIN- l-YL)-2-OXOETHYL]-9-PHENYL- 2,3,4,9-TETRAHYDRO-lH-BETA-CARBOLINE (SCHEME 4)
Figure imgf000058_0002
Compound 5
Step 1. tert-Butyl 9-phenyl-l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carboline-2-carboxylate
Figure imgf000058_0003
To a solution of tert-butyl l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carboline-2-carboxylate (250 mg, 0.92 mmol) in dioxane (5 mL) is added bromobenzene (288 mg, 1.84 mmol), Pd2dba3 (84 mg , 0.092 mmol), Xantphos (53 mg, 0.092 mmol) and Cs2CO3 (400 mg, 1.23 mmol). The mixture is degassed with nitrogen and heated at 110 0C overnight. The mixture is cooled to rt and diluted with DCM (25 mL). The mixture is filtered through Celite and the filtrate evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexane/EtOAc (2:1) to yield the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 349.20 (M+ +1).
Step 2. 9-Phenyl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline
Figure imgf000059_0001
?-Butyl 9-phenyl-l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carboline-2-carboxylate (268 mg,
0.77 mmol) is dissolved in 4N HCl in dioxane (5 mL) and stirred for 4 h at rt. The solvent is evaporated under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as its hydrochloride salt. MS (+VE) m/z 249.14 (M+ +1). Step 3. 2-[2-(4-Cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-9-phenyl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro- lH-beta-carboline
Figure imgf000059_0002
To a solution of 9-phenyl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline hydrochloride (270 mg, 0.77 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) is added NaI (50 mg, 0.333 mmol), K2CO3 (400 mg, 2.89 mmol) and l-(chloroacetyl)-4-cyclobutylpiperazine (200 mg, 0.927 mmol). The mixture is stirred overnight at rt. The mixture is diluted with DCM (25 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filtrate is concentrated and the residue is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (95:5:5) to yield the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.55-7.49 (3 H, m), 7.43-7.34 (3H, d), 7.24 (IH, t), 7.16-7.13 (2H, m), 3.65-3.63 (6H, m), 3.42 (2H, s), 2.99 (2H, t), 2.90 (2H, t), 2.72 (IH, m), 2.33-2.30 (4H, m), 2.03-1.98 (2H, m), 1.93-1.86 (2H, m); 1.74-1.68 (2H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 429.13 (M+ +1).
6. 2-[2-(4-CYCLOBUTYLPIPERAZIN- I -YL)^-OXOETHYL]-O-PYRIMIDIN- 5-YL-2,3 ,4,9-TETRAHYDRO- IH-BET A-CARBOLINE (SCHEME 5)
Figure imgf000060_0001
Compound 6
To a solution of 6-bromo-2-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]- 2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline (200 mg, 0.463 mmol) in EtOH (7 mL), toluene (7 mL) and water (2 mL) is added pyrimidine-5-boronic acid (100 mg, 0.811 mmol), K2CO3 (256 mg, 1.85 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (27 mg, 0.23 mmol). The mixture is degassed with nitrogen and heated in a sealed tube overnight at 95 0C. The mixture is cooled to rt and partitioned between EtOAc (50 mL) and IN NaOH (50 mL). The mixture is extracted with EtOAc (2 x 50 mL). The combined organic extracts are placed directly on an SCX ion exchange resin and washed first with EtOAc/MeOH (95:5) to waste and second with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (90:10:10) collected and evaporated. The residue is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (90:10:10) to yield the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 9.16 (IH, s), 9.00 (2H, s), 8.23 (IH, br ex s), 7.67 (IH, d), 7.44 (IH, d), 7.34 (IH, dd), 3.82 (2H, s), 3.66 (4H, m), 2.48 (2H, s), 2.97 (2H, t), 2.87 (2H, t), 2.69 (IH, m), 2.30 (4H, m), 2.04-1.97 (2H, m), 1.88-1.82 (2H, m); 1.74-1.68 (2H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 431.14 (M+ +1).
7. 2-[2-(4-CYCLOBUTYLPIPERAZIN- 1 -YL)-2-OXOETHYL]-2,3,4,9-
TETRAHYDRO- IH-BETA-CARBOLINE-6-CARBONΓTRILE (SCHEME 5)
Figure imgf000060_0002
Compound 7
To a solution of 6-bromo-2-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]- 2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline (470 mg, 1.10 mmol) in DMF (6 mL) is added
Zn(CN)2 (102 mg, 0.872 mmol), Pd2dba3 (50 mg, 0.055 mmol) and dppf (60 mg, 0.11 mmol). The mixture is degassed with nitrogen and heated in a sealed tube overnight at 120 0C. The mixture is cooled to rt and partitioned between EtOAc (50 mL) and IN NaOH (50 mL). The mixture is extracted with EtOAc (2 x 50 mL). The combined organic extracts are dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (95:5:5) to yield the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.50 (IH, br ex s), 7.63 (IH, d), 7.48 (IH, d), 7.31 (IH, dd), 3.82 (2H, s), 3.66 (4H, m), 2.48 (2H, s), 2.97 (2H, t), 2.87 (2H, t), 2.69 (IH, m), 2.30 (4H, m), 2.04-1.97 (2H, m), 1.88-1.82 (2H, m); 1.74-1.65 (2H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 378.11 (M+ +1).
8. 2-[2-(4-ISOPROPYLPIPERAZIN- 1 -YL)-2-OXOETHYL]-2,3,4,9- TETRAHYDRO- 1 H-BETA-CARBOLINE (SCHEME 6)
Figure imgf000061_0001
Compound 8
Step 1. tert-Butyl l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2-ylacetate
Figure imgf000061_0002
To a solution of 2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline (1.72 mg, 10 mmol) in acetonitrile (50 mL) is added t-butyl bromoacetate (1.95 g, 10 mmol), NaI (500 mg, 3.33 mmol) and K2CO3 (2.07 mg, 15 mmol). The mixture is stirred overnight at rt. The mixture is diluted with DCM (50 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filtrate is concentrated and the residue purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with EtOAc/hexane (1: 1) to yield the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 287.12 (M++l).
Step 2. l,3,4,9-Tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2-ylacetic acid
Figure imgf000061_0003
tert-Butyl l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2-ylacetate (2.7 g, 9.4 mmol) is dissolved in 4N HCl dioxane and heated at 80 0C for 4 h. The mixture is cooled to rt and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as its hydrochloride salt. MS (+VE) m/z 231.13 (M+ +1).
Step 3. 2-[2-(4-isopropylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta- carboline
Figure imgf000062_0001
To a solution of l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2-ylacetic acid (26 mg, 0.96 mmol) in 5% TEA in DMA (0.48 mL), is added 1-isopropylpiperazine (10.3 mg, 0.08 mmol) in 5% TEA in DMA (0.4 mL) and DMC (13.5 mg, 0.08 mmol) in acetonitrile (0.4 mL). The mixture is heated at 50 0C for 5 h. The mixture is cooled to rt and partitioned between EtOAc (1 mL) and IN NaOH (1 mL). The organic layer is extracted and concentrated under vacuum (~1 mL) to remove excess TEA. The residue is redissolved in EtOAc, placed directly on an SCX ion exchange resin and washed first with EtOAc/MeOH (95:5) (discarded as waste) and second with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (90:10:10) which is collected and evaporated to yield the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.07 (IH, br ex s), 7.47 (IH, d), 7.30 (IH, d), 7.10 (2H, m), 3.78 (2H, s), 3.65 (4H, m), 3.45 (2H, s), 2.94 (2H, t), 2.82 (2H, t), 2.69 (IH, m), 2.49 (4H, m), 1.02 (6H, d); MS (+VE) m/z 341.11 (M+ +l).
9. 7-[2-(4-CYCLOBUTYLPIPERAZIN-l-YL)-2-OXOETHYL]-9-METHYL- 6,7,8,9-TETRAHYDRO-5H-PYRIDO[4',3':4,5]PYRROLO[2,3-B]PYRIDINE (SCHEME 7)
Figure imgf000062_0002
Compound 9
Step 1. 1 -Methyl- 1 H-pyrro Io [2,3 -b]pyridine-3-carbaldehyde
Figure imgf000062_0003
POCl3 (1.48 mL, 9.65 mmol) is added dropwise to a 0 0C solution of DMF (5 mL). The mixture is stirred 0.5 h at 0 0C. In a separate flask, 1 -methyl- IH- pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (Journal of the American Chemical Society (2005) 127(22):8050-57; 1.04 g, 7.87 mmol) is dissolved in DMF (10 mL) and added dropwise to the first solution at 0 0C. The mixture is allowed to warm to rt and stirred overnight. The mixture is diluted with water (100 mL) and basified with IO N NaOH. The mixture is extracted with DCM (3 x 50 mL). The combined organic extracts are washed with water (3 x 100 mL) and brine (100 mL), dried over Na2SO4, and evaporated to yield the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 161.12 (M+ +1). Step 2. l-Methyl-3-[(E)-2-nitrovinyl]-lH-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine
Figure imgf000063_0001
To a solution of l-methyl-lH-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-carbaldehyde (1.18 g, 7.34 mmol) in nitromethane (20 mL) is added NH4OAc (200 mg, 2.59 mmol). The mixture is stirred overnight at 70 0C. The solution is cooled to rt and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue is dissolved in EtOAc (50 mL) and extracted with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (2 x 50 mL). The organic extract is dried over Na2SO4, and evaporated to yield the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 204.18 (M+ +1).
Step 3. 2-(l-Methyl-lH-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)ethanamine
Figure imgf000063_0002
To a 0 0C solution of l-methyl-3-[(E)-2-nitrovinyl]-lH-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine
(1.31 g, 7.00 mmol) in THF (50 mL) is added LiAlH4 (1.06 mg, 28 mmol). The mixture is allowed to warm to rt and stirred overnight. The solution is cooled to 0 0C and water (1.06 mL), 20 % KOH (1.06 mL) and water (3.18 mL) are added sequentially. The mixture is stirred for 0.5 h. Na2SO4 is added and the mixture is filtered through Celite. The filter cake is pressed and washed with DCM (2 x 100 mL). The filtrate is evaporated and the crude product chromatographed on silica eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (95:5:5) to yield the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 176.21 (M+ +1).
Step 4. 9-Methyl-6,7,8,9-tetrahydro-5H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine
Figure imgf000064_0001
To a solution of 2-(l-methyl-lH-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)ethanamine (210 mg, 1.20 mmol) in formic acid (5 mL) is added paraformaldehyde (36 mg, 1.20 mmol). The mixture is heated at 65 0C for 0.5 h. The mixture is cooled and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The residue is partitioned between DCM (25 mL) and 1 N NaOH (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with DCM (2 x 25 mL). The combined organic extracts are dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated under reduced pressure to yield the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 188.22 (M++l).
Step 5. 7-[2-(4-Cyclobutylpiperazin-l -yl)-2-oxoethyl]-9-methyl-6,7,8,9-tetrahydro- 5H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine
Figure imgf000064_0002
To a solution of 9-methyl-6,7,8,9-tetrahydro-5H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]pyrrolo[2,3- b]pyridine (205 mg, 1.09 mmol) in acetonitrile (5 mL) is added NaI (50 mg, 0.333 mmol), K2CO3 (451 mg, 3.27 mmol) and l-(chloroacetyl)-4-cyclobutylpiperazine (283 mg, 1.31 mmol). The mixture is stirred overnight at rt. The mixture is diluted with DCM (25 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filtrate is concentrated and the residue is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (90:10:5) to yield the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.24 (IH, dd), 7.74 (3H, d), 7.24 (IH, dd), 7.01 (IH, dd), 3.81 (2H, s), 3.71 (3H, s), 3.67 (4H, m), 3.5 (2H, s), 2.93 (2H, t), 2.81 (2H, t), 2.69 (IH, m), 2.32-2.28 (4H, m), 2.03-1.99 (2H, m), 1.88-1.82 (2H, m); 1.74-1.68 (2H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 368.14 (M+ +1).
10. 2-[2-(4-CYCLOBUTYLPIPERAZIN-l-YL)-2-OXOETHYL]-7-METHOXY- 2,3,4,5-TETRAHYDRO-lH-PYRIDO[4,3-B]INDOLE (SCHEME 8)
Figure imgf000065_0001
Compound 10
To a solution of 8-methoxy-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-pyrido[4,3-b]indole (AKos
Consulting and Solutions GmbH; 300 mg, 1.48 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) is added NaI (60 mg, 0.40 mmol), K2CO3 (300 mg, 2.17 mmol) and l-(chloroacetyl)-4- cyclobutylpiperazine (321 mg, 1.48 mmol). The mixture is stirred overnight at rt.
The mixture is diluted with DCM (25 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filtrate is concentrated and the residue is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA
(90:10:5) to yield the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.66 (IH, br ex s), 7.20 (IH, d), 6.93 (IH, d), 6.80 (IH, dd), 3.85 (3H, s), 3.76 (2H, s), 3.71 (4H, m), 3.45 (2H, s), 2.93 (2H, t), 2.79 (2H, t), 2.69 (IH, m), 2.36 (4H, m), 2.03-1.99 (2H, m),
1.88-1.82 (2H, m); 1.74-1.68 (2H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 383.24 (M++l).
11. 2-[2-(4-CYCLOBUTYLPIPERAZIN- 1 -YL)-2-OXOETHYL]-8-METHOXY- 1,2,3,4-TETRAHYDROPYRAZINO[1 , 2-A]INDOLE (SCHEME 9)
Figure imgf000065_0002
Compound 11 To a solution of 8-methoxy-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrazino[l,2-a]indole
(ARKIVOC 2004(v): 286-300; 127 mg, 0.628 mmol) in acetonitrile (4 mL) is added NaI (50 mg, 0.33 mmol), K2CO3 (300 mg, 2.17 mmol) and l-(chloroacetyl)-4- cyclobutylpiperazine (150 mg, 0.69 mmol). The mixture is stirred overnight at rt. The mixture is diluted with DCM (25 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filtrate is concentrated and the residue is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/MeOH/TEA (95:5:5) to yield the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.16 (IH, d), 7.03 (IH, d), 6.82 (IH, dd), 6.13 (IH, s), 4.05 (2H, t), 3.87 (2H, s), 3.84 (3H, s), 3.66 (4H, m), 3.41 (2H, s), 3.04 (2H, t), 2.69 (IH, m), 2.30 (4H, m), 2.03-1.99 (2H, m), 1.88- 1.82 (2H, m); 1.74-1.64 (2H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 383.13 (M++l).
12. l-(4-CYCLOBUTYL-PIPERAZIN-l-YL)-2-(l,2-DIHYDRO-4H-3,8A,9- TRIAZA-FLUOREN-3 -YL)-ETHANONE (SCHEME 10)
Figure imgf000066_0001
Step 1. 2-(2-Azido-ethyl)-pyrazolo[l,5-a]pyridine
Figure imgf000066_0002
To a solution of 2-pyrazolo[l,5-a]pyridin-2-yl-ethanol (1.0 g, 6.2 mmol) in DCM (30 mL) containing TEA (1.25 g, 12.4 mmol, 2.0 eq.) cooled to 0 0C is added methanesulfonyl chloride (850 mg, 7.4 mmol, 1.2 eq.). The mixture is stirred at 0 0C for an additional 1 h, then warmed to rt and stirred for an additional 3 h. DCM is evaporated, and the residue is dissolved in DMF (10 mL). To the solution is added sodium azide (1.20 g, 18.6 mmol, 3.0 eq.). The reaction mixture is stirred at 50 0C for an additional 24 h. The reaction mixture is cooled to rt, poured into ice-cooled water
(20 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (15 mL x 3). The combined organic extracts are washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with hexane/EtOAc (80:20) to give the azido compound. MS (+VE) m/z 189.10 (M++l).
Step 2. 2-Pyrazolo[l,5-a]pyridin-2-yl-ethylamine
Figure imgf000066_0003
To a solution of 2-(2-azido-ethyl)-pyrazolo[l,5-a]pyridine (470 g, 2.5 mmol) in THF (10 mL) cooled to 00C is added triphenylphosphine (1.96 g, 7.5 mmol, 3 eq.). The mixture is stirred at 00C for an additional 1 h, then warmed to rt and stirred for an additional 3 h. THF is evaporated, and the residue is purified through chromatography eluting with DCM/MeOH (90:10) to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 162.10 (M++l).
Step 3. l,2,3,4-Tetrahydro-3,8a,9-triaza-fluorene
Figure imgf000066_0004
To a solution of 2-pyrazolo[l,5-a]pyridin-2-yl-ethylamine (400 g, 2.47 mmol) in formic acid (3 mL) at rt is added paraformaldehyde (83 mg, 2.59 mmol, 1.05 eq.). The mixture is stirred at rt overnight. Formic acid is evaporated, and the residue is dissolved in DCM (10 mL) and washed with 2.0 N aqueous NaOH solution. The aqueous layer is extracted with DCM twice (2 x 5 mL). The combined organics are dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through silica gel chromatography eluting with DCM/MeOH (90: 10) to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 174.2 (M++l).
Step 4. l-(4-Cyclobutyl-piperazin-l-yl)-2-(l,2-dihydro-4H-3,8a,9-triaza-fluoren-3- yl)-ethanone
Figure imgf000067_0001
To a stirred solution of l,2,3,4-tetrahydro-3,8a,9-triaza-fluorene (210 mg, 1.21 mmol) in acetonitrile (10.0 mL) is added l-(chloroacetyl)-4-cyclobutylpiperazine (288 mg, 1.33 mmol, 1.1 eq.), K2CO3 (332 mg, 2.4 mmol, 2.0 eq.), and NaI (50 mg). The resulting mixture is stirred at rt overnight. Water (10.0 mL) is added to quench the reaction, and then the solvent is evaporated. The residue is extracted with DCM (3 x 10 mL). The combined organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give a residue that is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/TEA (96:4) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.34 (IH, d) 7.25 (IH, d), 7.02 (1 H, dd), 6.40 (IH, dt), 3.76 (2H, s), 3.64 (4H, m), 3.44 (2H, s), 2.84-3.02 (4H, M), 2.65(1H, m), 2.26 (4H, m), 1.60-2.10 (6H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 354.2 (M+ +1).
13. 1 -(4-CYCLOBUTYL-PIPERAZIN- 1 - YL)-2 -(3 ,4-DIHYDRO- 1 H- BENZO[4,5]FURO[2,3-C]PYRIDIN-2 -YL)-ETHANONE (SCHEME 11)
Figure imgf000067_0002
Step 1. l,2,3,4-Tetrahydro-benzo[4,5]furo[2,3-c]pyridine
Figure imgf000068_0001
To a solution of 2-benzofuran-3-yl-ethylamine (510 g, 23.16mmol) in formic acid (3 mL) at rt is added paraformaldehyde (104 mg, 3.17 mmol, 1.1 eq.). The mixture is stirred at 500C for 3 h. Formic acid is evaporated. The residue is dissolved in DCM (10 mL) and washed with 2.0 N aqueous NaOH solution. The aqueous layer is extracted with DCM twice (2 x 5 mL). The combined organics are dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with DCM/MeOH (90:10) to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 174.1 (M+ +1). Step 2. l-(4-Cyclobutyl-piperazin-l-yl)-2-(3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[4,5]furo[2,3- c]pyridin-2-yl)-ethanone
Figure imgf000068_0002
To a stirred solution of l,2,3,4-tetrahydro-benzo[4,5]furo[2,3-c]pyridine (210 mg, 1.21 mmol) in acetonitrile (10.0 mL) is added l-(chloroacetyl)-4- cyclobutylpiperazine (288 mg, 1.33 mmol, 1.1 eq.), K2CO3 (332 mg, 2.4 mmol, 2.0 eq.), and NaI (50 mg). The resulting mixture is stirred at rt overnight. Water (10.0 mL) is added to quench the reaction, and then the acetonitrile is evaporated. The residue is extracted with DCM (3 x 10 mL). The combined organic extracts are dried over sodium sulfate, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give a residue that is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/TEA (96:4) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.40-7.45 (2H, m), 7.18-7.24 (2H, dd, m), 3.76 (2H, s), 3.63 (4H, m), 3.46 (2H, s), 2.92 (2H, t), 2.74 (2H, t), 2.32 (5H, m), 1.60-2.10 (6H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 354.2 (M+ +1). 14. l-(4-CYCLOBUTYL-PIPERAZIN-l-YL)-2-(3,4-DIHYDRO-lH-
BENZO[4,5]THIENO[2,3-C]PYRIDIN-2 -YL)-ETHANONE (SCHEME 11)
Figure imgf000069_0001
Compound 14 Step 1. 2-Benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl-ethylamine
Figure imgf000069_0002
To the solution of benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl-acetonitrile (1.03 g, 5.95 mmol) in THF (20 mL) is added a solution Of BH3 in THF ( 1.0 N, 3 mL, 13 mmol, 2.2 eq.). The resulting solution is stirred at 50 0C for 16 h. Water (10 mL) is added to quench the reaction and the remaining BH3 is destroyed with hydrochloric acid (37%, 1.0 mL). The solution is basified with aqueous NaOH solution until the pH > 10. THF is evaporated, and the residue is extracted with DCM (3 x 10 mL). The combined organic extracts are dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with DCM/MeOH (90:10) to give the title amine compound. MS (+VE) m/z 178.2 (M+ +1).
Step 2. l,2,3,4-Tetrahydro-benzo[4,5]thieno[2,3-c]pyridine
Figure imgf000069_0003
To a solution of 2-benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl-ethylamine (596 mg, 3.36 mmol) in formic acid (4 mL) at rt is added paraformaldehyde (101 mg, 3.17 mmol, 1.0 eq.). The mixture is stirred at 50 0C for 2 h. Formic acid is evaporated, and the residue is dissolved in DCM (10 mL), washed with 2.0 N aqueous NaOH solution. The aqueous layer is extracted with DCM twice (2 x 5 mL). The combined organics are dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with DCM/MeOH (90:10) to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 190.2 (M+ +1). Step 3. l-(4-cyclobutyl-piperazin-l-yl)-2-(3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[4,5]thieno[2,3- c]pyridin-2-yl)-ethanone
Figure imgf000070_0001
To a stirred solution of l,2,3,4-tetrahydro-benzo[4,5]thieno[2,3-c]pyridine (190 mg, 1.0 mmol) in acetonitrile (10.0 mL) is added l-(chloroacetyl)-4- cyclobutylpiperazine (238 mg, 1.10 mmol, 1.1 eq.), K2CO3 (332 mg, 2.4 mmol, 2.4 eq.), and NaI (50 mg). The resulting mixture is stirred at rt overnight. Water (10.0 mL) is added to quench the reaction, and then the acetonitrile is evaporated. The residue is extracted with DCM (10 mL x 3). The combined organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give a residue that is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/TEA (96:4) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.78 (IH, d), 7.59 (IH, d), 7.25-7.40 (2H, m), 3.85 (2H, s), 3.66 (4H, m), 3.45 (2H, s), 2.97 (2H, t), 2.87 (2H, t), 2.69 (IH, m), 2.31 (4H, m), 1.60-2.10 (6H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 370.1 (M+ +1).
15. 7-[2-(4-CYCLOBUTYL-PIPERAZIN- I -YL)^-OXO-ETHYL]-S-METHYL-
5,6,7,8-TETRAHYDRO-3H-PYRIDO[4',3':4,5]THIENO[2,3-D]PYRIMIDIN-4-ONE (SCHEME 12)
Figure imgf000070_0002
Step 1. 3-Methyl-4-oxo-3,5,6,8-tetrahydro-4H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3- d]pyrimidine-7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000070_0003
To a solution of 4-oxo-3,5,6,8-tetrahydro-4H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3- d]pyrimidine-7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.40 g, 5.0 mmol) in acetonitrile (30 mL) at 0 0C is added K2CO3 (1.38 g, 10 mmol, 2.0 eq.) followed by the addition of iodomethane (851 mg, 6.0 mmol, 1.2 eq.). The mixture is stirred at 50 0C for 5 h. Acetonitrile is evaporated, and the residue is extracted with DCM twice (2 x 10 mL). The combined organics are washed with brine and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with hexane/EtOAc (70:30) to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 294.2 (M+ +1). Step 2. 3-Methyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-3H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4- one
Figure imgf000071_0001
To a solution of 3-methyl-4-oxo-3,5,6,8-tetrahydro-4H- pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidine-7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.18 g, 4.0 mmol) in EtOH (15 mL) is added water (10 mL) followed by the addition of NaOH (800 mg, 20 mmol, 5 eq.). The resulting mixture is refluxed for 24 h. The reaction mixture is cooled to rt, and EtOH is evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is extracted with DCM (20 mL x 2). The combined organics are washed with brine and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with DCM/MeOH (90: 10) to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 222.1 (M+ +1 ).
Step 3. 7-[2-(4-Cyclobutyl-piperazin-l-yl)-2-oxo-ethyl]-3-methyl-5,6,7,8- tetrahydro-3H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-one
Figure imgf000071_0002
To a stirred solution of 3-methyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-3H- pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-one (221 mg, 1..0 mmol) in acetonitrile
(10.0 mL) is added l-(chloroacetyl)-4-cyclobutylpiperazine (238 mg, 1.10 mmol, 1.1 eq.), K2CO3 (332 mg, 2.4 mmol, 2.4 eq.), and NaI (50 mg). The resulting mixture is stirred at 45 0C overnight. Water (10.0 mL) is added to quench the reaction, and the acetonitrile is evaporated. The residue is extracted with DCM (10 mL x 3). The combined organic extracts are dried over sodium sulfate, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give a residue that is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/EtOH/TEA (96:4:4) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.92 (IH, 3), 3.77 (2H, s), 3.60 (4H, m), 3.56 (3H, s), 3.41 (2H, s), 2.93 (2H, t), 2.88 (2H, t), 2.68 (IH, m), 2.28 (4H, m), 1.60-2.10 (6H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 402.1 (M+
16. l-(4-CYCLOBUTYL-PIPERAZIN-l-YL)-2-(5,8-DIHYDRO-6H-
PYRIDO[4',3':4,5]-THIENO[2,3-D]PYRIMIDIN-7-YL)-ETHANONE (SCHEME 12)
Figure imgf000072_0001
Compound 16
Step 1. 4-Chloro-5,8-dihydro-6H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidine-7- carboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000072_0002
To a mixture of 4-oxo-3,5,6,8-tetrahydro-4H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3- d]pyrimidine-7 -carboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.40 g, 5.0 mmol) and pyridine (791 mg) is added POCl3 (3.06 g, 4.0eq.). The mixture is stirred at 100 0C for 3 h. POCl3 is evaporated, and the residue is taken in EtOAc (30 mL), basified with aqueous NaHCO3 solution. The organic layer is collected, washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with hexane/EtOAC (70:30) to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 298.2(M+ +1). Step 2. 5,8-Dihydro-6H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidine-7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000073_0001
To a mixture of 4-chloro-5,8-dihydro-6H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3- d]pyrimidine-7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.00 g, 3.34 mmol) and MeOH (10 mL) in a 100 mL round bottom flask is added palladium on charcoal (10%, 100 mg). The mixture is hydrogenated with a hydrogen balloon at rt for 3 h. Palladium on charcoal is filtered off through Celite, and the filter cake is washed with MeOH (5 mL x 2). The combined organic washes are concentrated under reduced pressure, and the residue is taken up in EtOAc (30 mL). The solution is basified with aqueous NaHCθ3 solution. The organic layer is collected, washed with brine, and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with hexane/EtOAC (70:30) to give the desired compound. MS (+VE) m/z 264.1 (M+ +1).
Step 3. 5,6,7,8-Tetrahydro-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidine
Figure imgf000073_0002
To a solution of 5,8-dihydro-6H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidine-7- carboxylic acid ethyl ester (800 g, 3.0 mmol) in EtOH (15 mL) is added water (10 mL) followed by the addition of NaOH (600 mg, 15 mmol, 5 eq.). The resulting mixture is refluxed for 24 h. The reaction mixture is cooled to rt, and EtOH is evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is extracted with DCM (2 x 20 mL), and washed with brine. The combined organics are dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with DCM/MeOH (90:10) to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 192.2 (M++l).
Step 4. l-(4-Cyclobutyl-piperazin-l-yl)-2-(5,8-dihydro-6H- pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-ethanone
Figure imgf000073_0003
To a stirred solution of 5,6,7, 8-tetrahydro-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3- d]pyrimidine (191 mg, 1.0 mmol) in acetonitrile (10.0 mL) is added l-(chloroacetyl)- 4-cyclobutylpiperazine (238 mg, 1.10 mmol, 1.1 eq.), K2CO3 (332 mg, 2.4 mmol, 2.4 eq.), and NaI (50 mg). The resulting mixture is stirred at 45 0C overnight. Water (10.0 mL) is added to quench the reaction, and then the acetonitrile is evaporated. The residue is extracted with DCM (3 x 10 mL). The combined organic extracts are dried over sodium sulfate, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give a residue that is purified by PTLC eluting with EtOAc/EtOH/TEA (96:4:4) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 9.03 (IH, s), 8.91 (IH, s), 3.90 (2H, s), 3.62 (4H, m), 3.48 (2H, s), 3.01 (2H, t), 2.92 (2H, m), 2.69 (IH, m), 2.30 (4H, m), 1.60-2.10 (6H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 372.2 (M+ +1).
17. i -(4-CYCLOBUTYL-PIPERAZIN- 1 - YL)-2 -(2-METHYL-5, 8-DIHYDRO-6H- PYRIDO-[4',3':4,5]THIENO[2,3-D]PYRIMIDIN-7-YL)-ETHANONE (SCHEME 12)
Figure imgf000074_0001
Compound 17
Step 1. 4-Hydroxy-2-methyl-5,8-dihydro-6H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3- d]pyrimidine-7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000074_0002
To a solution of 2-amino-4,7-dihydro-5H-thieno[2,3-c]pyridine-3,6- dicarboxylic acid diethyl ester (2.98 g, 10.0 mmol) in HCl-dioxane (4.0 N, 20 mL) is added CH3CN (2.0 mL). The mixture is stirred at rt for 8 h, heated to 100 0C, and stirred for an additional 8 h at 1000C. Dioxane is evaporated, and the residue is taken up in water (30 mL). The solution is basified with aqueous NaHCO3 solution. The resulting solid is collected by filtration, washed with water, dried under high vacuum to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 293.1(M++1). Step 2. 4-Chloro-2-methyl-5,8-dihydro-6H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidine- 7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000075_0001
To a mixture of 4-hydroxy-2-methyl-5,8-dihydro-6H- pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidine-7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.47 g, 5.0 mmol) and pyridine (791 mg) is added POCI3 (3.06 g, 4.0 eq.). The mixture is stirred at 100 0C for 3 h. Excess POCI3 is evaporated, and the residue is taken up in EtOAc
(30 mL). The solution is basified with aqueous NaHCθ3 solution. The organic layer is collected, washed with brine, and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with hexane/EtOAc (80:20) to give the title compound. MS
(+VE) m/z 312.0(M++l).
Step 3. 2-Methyl-5,8-dihydro-6H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidine-7- carboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000075_0002
To a mixture of 4-chloro-2-methyl-5,8-dihydro-6H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3- d]pyrimidine-7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.00 g, 3.21 mmol) and MeOH (10 mL) in a 100 mL round bottom flask is added palladium on charcoal (10%, 100 mg). The mixture is hydrogenated with hydrogen filled balloon at rt for 3 h. Palladium on charcoal is filtered off through Celite, and the filter cake is washed with MeOH (5 mL x 2). The combined organic washes are concentrated under reduced pressure, and the residue is taken up in EtOAc (30 mL). The solution is basified with aqueous NaHCθ3 solution. The organic layer is collected, washed with brine, and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with hexane/EtOAc (70:30) to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 278.10 (M++l).
Step 4. 2-Methyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidine
Figure imgf000076_0001
To the solution of 2-methyl-5,8-dihydro-6H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3- d]pyrimidine-7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (800 g, 2.88 mmol) in EtOH (15 mL) is added water (10 mL), followed by the addition of NaOH (600 mg, 15 mmol, 5.2 eq.). The resulting mixture is refluxed for 24 h. The reaction mixture is cooled to rt, and the EtOH is evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is extracted with DCM
(2 x 20 mL). The combined organics are washed with brine and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield a residue which is purified through chromatography eluting with DCM/MeOH (90:10) to give the title compound. MS (+VE) m/z 206.1 (M+ +1).
Step 5. 1 -(4-Cyclobutyl-piperazin- 1 -yl)-2-(2-methyl-5,8-dihydro-6H- pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-ethanone
Figure imgf000076_0002
To a stirred solution of 2-methyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro- pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidine (205 mg, 1. 0 mmol) in acetonitrile (10.0 mL) is added l-(chloroacetyl)-4-cyclobutylpiperazine (238 mg, 1.10 mmol, 1.1 eq.),
K2CO3 (332 mg, 2.4 mmol, 2.4 eq.), and NaI (50 mg). The resulting mixture is stirred at 45 0C overnight. Water (10.0 mL) is added to quench the reaction, and the acetonitrile is evaporated. The residue is extracted with DCM (3 x 10 mL). The combined organic extracts are dried over sodium sulfate, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give a residue that is purified by PTLC eluting with
EtOAc/EtOH/TEA (96:4:4) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.81 (IH, s), 3.87 (2H, s), 3.62 (4H, m), 3.47 (2H, s), 3.00 (2H, t), 2.91 (2H, m),
2.82 (3 H, s), 2.70 (IH, m), 2.30 (4H, m), 1.60-2.10 (6H, m); MS (+VE) m/z 386.20 (M+ +1). EXAMPLE 2 Preparation of Additional Representative Compounds
Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein. Compounds listed in Tables I and II are prepared using such methods. A "*" in the column headed "K1" in Table I indicates that the compound has a K1 in the assay of Example 7 that is less than 1 micromolar. A "*" in the column headed "%" in Table II indicates that the percent inhibition of agonist-induced GTP-gammaS binding to H3, in the 4 μM screening assay described in Example 8, is at least 90%.
The molecular weight (presented as M+l) obtained using the method described above is shown in the column headed "MS."
Table I
Figure imgf000077_0001
Figure imgf000078_0001
Figure imgf000079_0001
Table π
Compound Name MS %
2-[2-(2-Methyl-l,4'- bipiperidin- 1 '-yl)-2-
34 oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9- 395.28 * tetrahydro- 1 H-beta- carboline
Figure imgf000080_0001
Figure imgf000081_0001
Figure imgf000082_0001
Figure imgf000083_0001
Figure imgf000084_0002
EXAMPLE 3 Preparation of Additional Representative Compounds
Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein.
Table III
Figure imgf000084_0001
Figure imgf000085_0001
Figure imgf000086_0001
Figure imgf000087_0001
Figure imgf000088_0001
Figure imgf000089_0001
Figure imgf000090_0001
Figure imgf000091_0001
Figure imgf000092_0001
Figure imgf000093_0001
Figure imgf000094_0001
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000097_0001
EXAMPLE 4 Preparation of Chimeric Human H3 Receptor
Chimeric H3 receptor cDNA from human H3 receptor is generated from three cDNA fragments: (1) a human H3 receptor cDNA 5' fragment; (2) a human H3 receptor cDNA 3' fragment; and (3) a rat Ga^ cDNA fragment, each containing appropriate, overlapping linker sequences, as described in Example 1 of US Patent Application Serial Number 11/355,711, which published as US 2006/0188960, and is hereby incorporated by reference for its teaching of the preparation of a chimeric human H3 receptor-rat Ga^ baculoviral expression construct that has the sequence provided in SEQ ID NO:7 of US 2006/0188960, and encodes a polypeptide that has the sequence provided in SEQ ID NO:8 of US 2006/0188960. EXAMPLE 5
Chimeric Human H3 Receptor Baculovirus Preparation and Infection
The chimeric human H3 receptor-rat Ga^ baculoviral expression vector is co- transfected along with BACULOGOLD DNA (BD PHARMINGEN, San Diego, CA) into S/9 cells. The S/9 cell culture supernatant is harvested three days post- transfection. The recombinant virus-containing supernatant is serially diluted in
Hink's TNM-FH insect medium (JRH Biosciences, Kansas City, KS) supplemented
Grace's salts and with 4.1 mM L-GIn, 3.3 g/L LAH, 3.3 g/L ultrafiltered yeastolate and 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum (hereinafter "insect medium") and plaque assayed for recombinant plaques. After four days, recombinant plaques are selected and harvested into 1 ml of insect medium for amplification. Each 1 ml volume of recombinant baculovirus (at passage 0) is used to infect a separate T25 flask containing 2 x 106 S/9 cells in 5 ml of insect medium. After five days of incubation at 270C, supernatant medium is harvested from each of the T25 infections for use as passage 1 inoculum.
Two of seven recombinant baculoviral clones are chosen for a second round of amplification, using 1 ml of passage 1 stock to infect 1 x 108 cells in 100 ml of insect medium divided into two T 175 flasks. Forty-eight hours post infection, passage 2 medium from each 100 ml prep is harvested and plaque assayed to determine virus titer. The cell pellets from the second round of amplification are assayed by affinity binding as described below to verify recombinant receptor expression. A third round of amplification is then initiated using a multiplicity of infection of 0.1 to infect a liter of S/9 cells. Forty hours post-infection, the supernatant medium is harvested to yield passage 3 baculoviral stock. The remaining cell pellet is assayed for affinity binding using the protocol of
DeMartino et al. (1994) J. Biol. Chem. 269(20): 14446-50 (which is incorporated herein by reference for its teaching of binding assays at page 14447), adapted as follows. Radioligand ranges from 0.40 - 40 nM [3H]-N-(a)methylhistamine (Perkin Elmer, Boston, MA) and assay buffer contains 50 mM Tris, 1 mM CaCl2, 5 mM MgCl2, 0.1% BSA, 0.1 mM bacitracin, and 100 KlU/ml aprotinin, pH 7.4. Filtration is carried out using GF/C WHATMAN filters (presoaked in 1.0% polyethyeneimine for 2 hr prior to use). Filters are washed three times with 5 ml cold assay buffer without BSA, bacitracin, or aprotinin and air dried for 12-16 hr. Radioactivity retained on filters is measured on a beta scintillation counter.
Titer of the passage 3 baculoviral stock is determined by plaque assay and a multiplicity of infection, incubation time course, binding assay experiment is carried out to determine conditions for optimal receptor expression. A multiplicity of infection of 0.5 and a 72-hr incubation period are preferred infection parameters for chimeric human H3 receptor-rat Ga^ expression in up to 1 -liter S/9 cell infection cultures.
Log-phase S/9 cells (INVITROGEN), are infected with one or more stocks of recombinant baculovirus followed by culturing in insect medium at 270C. Infections are carried out with virus directing the expression of human H3 receptor-rat G(Xi2 in combination with three G-protein subunit-expression virus stocks: 1) rat Ga^ G- protein-encoding virus stock (BIOSIGNAL #V5J008), 2) bovine βl G-protein- encoding virus stock (BIOSIGNAL #V5H012), and 3) human γ2 G-protein-encoding virus stock (BIOSIGNAL #V6B003), which may be obtained from BIOSIGNAL Inc., Montreal.
The infections are conveniently carried out at a multiplicity of infection of 0.5:1.0:0.5:0.5. At 72 hr post-infection, an aliquot of cell suspension is analyzed for viability by trypan blue dye exclusion. If no blue is detected by visual inspection, the S/9 cells are harvested via centrifugation (3000 rpm / 10 min / 40C).
EXAMPLE 6
Chimeric Human H3 Receptor Cell Membrane Preparations
S/9 cell pellets obtained as described in Example 5 are resuspended in homogenization buffer (10 mM HEPES, 250 mM sucrose, 0.5 μg/ml leupeptin, 2 μg/ml Aprotinin, 200 μM PMSF, and 2.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.4) and homogenized using a POLYTRON PTl 0-35 homogenizer (KINEMATICA AG, Lucerne,
Switzerland; setting 5 for 30 seconds). The homogenate is centrifuged (536 x g/ 10 min at 40C) to pellet the nuclei and unbroken cells. The supernatant containing the membranes is decanted to a clean centrifuge tube, centrifuged (48,000 x g/ 30 min, 40C) and the resulting pellet resuspended in 30 ml homogenization buffer. This centrifugation and resuspension step is repeated twice. The final pellet is resuspended in ice cold Dulbecco's PBS containing 5 mM EDTA and stored in frozen aliquots at - 8O0C until used for radioligand binding or functional response assays. The protein concentration of the resulting membrane preparation (hereinafter termed "P2 membranes") is conveniently measured using a Bradford protein assay (BIO-RAD LABORATORIES, Hercules, CA). By this measure, a 1 -liter culture of cells typically yields 100-150 mg of total membrane protein.
EXAMPLE 7
Chimeric Human H3 Receptor GTP Binding Assays
This Example illustrates a representative assay for evaluating agonist- stimulated GTP-gamma35S binding ("GTP binding") activity. Such GTP binding activity can be used to identify H3 antagonists and to differentiate neutral antagonist compounds from those that possess inverse agonist activity. This agonist-stimulated GTP binding activity can also be used to detect partial agonism mediated by antagonist compounds. A compound analyzed in this assay is referred to herein as a "test compound." Four independent baculoviral stocks (one directing the expression of the chimeric human H3 receptor and three directing the expression of each of the three subunits of a heterotrimeric G-protein) are used to infect a culture of Sfi cells as described above. P2 membranes are prepared as described above, and agonist- stimulated GTP binding on the P2 membranes is assessed using histamine (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) as agonist in order to ascertain that the receptor/G- protein-alpha-beta-gamma combination(s) yield a functional response as measured by GTP binding. P2 membranes are resuspended by Dounce homogenization (tight pestle) in GTP binding assay buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl2, 2 mM EGTA, 1 mg/ml BSA, 0.2 mg/ml bacitracin, 0.02 mg/ml aprotinin, 0.01 mg/ml saponin, 10 μM GDP) and added to assay tubes at a concentration of 35 μg protein/reaction tube. After adding increasing doses of histamine at concentrations ranging from 10"12 M to 10"5 M, reactions are initiated by the addition of 125 pM GTP-gamma35S (PERKIN ELMER; Boston, MA) with a final assay volume of 0.20 ml. In competition experiments, non-radiolabeled test compounds are added to separate reactions at concentrations ranging from 10"10 M to 10"6 M along with 1 μM histamine to yield a final volume of 0.20 ml. Neutral antagonists are antagonists that are substantially free of inherent agonist activity, and include those test compounds that reduce the histamine- stimulated GTP binding activity towards, but not below, baseline levels. In contrast, in the absence of added histamine, inverse agonists reduce the GTP binding activity of 5 the receptor-containing membranes below baseline. The elevation of GTP binding activity above baseline by a compound in the absence of added histamine in this assay demonstrates agonist activity.
After a 60-min incubation at room temperature, reactions are terminated by vacuum filtration over WHATMAN GF/C filters (pre-soaked in wash buffer, 0.1%
10 BSA) followed by washing with ice-cold wash buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 12OmM NaCl). The amount of receptor-bound (and thereby membrane-bound) GTP- gamma35S is determined by measuring the filter-bound radioactivity, preferably by liquid scintillation spectrometry of the washed filters. Non-specific binding is determined in parallel assays including 10 μM unlabeled GTP-gammaS and typically
15 represents less than 5 percent of total binding. Data is expressed as percent above basal (baseline). The results of GTP binding experiments are analyzed using SIGMAPLOT software (SPSS Inc., Chicago, IL). IC50 values are calculated by nonlinear regression analysis of dose-response curves using Kaleidograph (Synergy Software, Reading, PA).
20 Alternatively the data is analyzed as follows. First, the average bound radioactivity from negative control wells (no agonist) is subtracted from the bound radioactivity detected for each of the other experimental wells. Second, average bound radioactivity is calculated for the positive control wells (agonist wells). Then, percent inhibition for each compound tested is calculated using the equation: r. ^ T 1.-U V 1 AA 1 AA Bound radioactivity in Test Wells
Percent Inhibition = 100 - 100 r — ~, — j- .. ■/ . — : r~ — -,
L Bound radioactivity in Agonist J
Veils
25 The % inhibition data is plotted as a function of test compound concentration and test compound IC50 is determined using a linear regression in which x is ln(concentration of test compound) and y is ln(percent inhibition/(100 - percent inhibition). Data with a percent inhibition that is greater than 90% or less than 15% are rejected and are not used in the regression. The IC50 is
T r> (-intercept/slope) Calculated IC50 values are converted to K1 values by the Cheng-Prusoff correction (Cheng and Prusoff (1973) Biochem. Pharmacol. 22(23):3099-3108). Accordingly, the following equation: K1 = ICso/(l + [L]/ECso) is used, where [L] is the histamine concentration in the GTP binding assay, and EC50 is the concentration of histamine producing a 50% response, as determined by a dose-response analysis using concentrations of histamine ranging from 10~10 M to ICT6 M.
To assess agonist or inverse agonist activity of a test compound, this assay is performed in the absence of added histamine, and EC50 values are determined by analogous calculations, where the EC50 is the concentration of test compound producing a 50% response.
EXAMPLE 8 Chimeric Human H3 Receptor Screening: GTP Binding Assays
This Example illustrates a representative screening assay for evaluating inhibition of histamine-stimulated GTP-gamma35S binding. Such GTP binding activity can be used to identify H3 antagonists and inverse agonists. A compound analyzed in this assay is referred to herein as a "test compound," and the initial identification of antagonists and inverse agonists is performed using a test compound concentration of 4 μM.
Four independent baculoviral stocks (one directing the expression of the chimeric human H3 receptor and three directing the expression of each of the three subunits of a heterotrimeric G-protein) are used to infect a culture of Sfi cells as described above. P2 membranes are prepared as described above, and are resuspended by Dounce homogenization (tight pestle) in GTP binding assay buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl2, 2 mM EGTA, 1 mg/ml BSA, 0.2 mg/ml bacitracin, 0.02 mg/ml aprotinin, 0.01 mg/ml saponin, 10 μM GDP) and added to assay tubes at a concentration of 35 μg protein/reaction tube. Non-radio labeled test compounds are added to separate reactions at a concentration of 4 μM along with 1 μM histamine (agonist). Reactions are initiated by the addition of 125 pM GTP- gamma35S with a final assay volume of 0.20 ml. After a 60-min incubation at room temperature, reactions are terminated by vacuum filtration over GF/C filters (pre-soaked in 50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 12OmM NaCl plus 0.1% BSA) followed by washing with ice-cold buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 12OmM NaCl). The amount of receptor-bound (and thereby membrane-bound) GTP- gamma35S is determined by measuring the bound radioactivity, preferably by liquid scintillation spectrometry of the washed filters. Non-specific binding is determined using 10 uM GTP-gammaS and typically represents less than 5 percent of total binding. After subtraction of non-specific binding, data is expressed as percent inhibition of 1 μM histamine signal.
Neutral antagonists are those test compounds that reduce the histamine- stimulated GTP binding activity towards, but not below, baseline levels. In contrast, in the absence of added histamine, inverse agonists reduce the GTP binding activity of the receptor-containing membranes below baseline. Any test compound that elevates GTP binding activity above baseline in the absence of added histamine in this assay is defined as having agonist activity.

Claims

CLAIMSWhat is claimed is:
1. A compound of the Formula:
Figure imgf000104_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein: Y is C or N;
Figure imgf000104_0002
represents a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl that is fused to the ring represented by
Figure imgf000104_0003
and is also fused to the ring represented by ^^°
Figure imgf000104_0004
represents phenyl or a 5-or 6-membered heteroaryl that is fused to the ring represented
by
Figure imgf000104_0005
, each of which phenyl or heteroaryl is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) hydrogen, amino, halogen, cyano, hydroxy, nitro and oxo; and
(ii) Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkylsulfonyl, mono-or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminoCo-C4alkyl, phenylCo-C2alkyl or (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)Co- C2alkyl; each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with oxo, Ci-Cβalkyl or Ci- Cβalkoxy; n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; m is 0, 1 or 2; o is 1 or 2;
R2 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from C3-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; R4 and R5 are: (i) independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, C2-Cealkynyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and C2-C6alkyl ether; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, cyano, oxo, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, and 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; such that at least one of R4 and R5 is substituted with a nitrogen-containing heterocycle or an amine; or
(ii) taken together to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci- Cβhaloalkyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C2alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, phenylCo-C2alkyl (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
2. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 1, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000105_0001
wherein: p is 1, 2 or 3;
Re represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; and
R7 is Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
3. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 1, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000106_0001
wherein: p is 0, 1, 2 or 3;
Re represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; and
Rg is mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C2alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co- C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2- C6alkenyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-C6haloalkoxy, Ci-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C?cycloalkyl and 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl.
4. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 1, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000106_0002
wherein: p and q are independently 0, 1, 2 or 3;
Re represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; and
R7 is Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, (VCβalkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
5. A compound of the Formula:
Figure imgf000107_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein:
D i ' (A )x i B^-W A, B, D and E are independently N or CRi; such that A is aromatic;
W, X and Y are independently C or N;
Z is CR9, N, NR3, S or O; n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; m is 0, 1 or 2; o is 1 or 2;
Each Ri is independently:
(i) hydrogen, amino, halogen, cyano, hydroxy, nitro or oxo; or
(ii) Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkylsulfonyl, mono-or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminoCo-C4alkyl, phenylCo-C2alkyl or (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)Co- C2alkyl; each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with oxo, Ci-Cβalkyl or Ci- Cβalkoxy; R2 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from C2-Cealkyl, C2-Cealkenyl,
C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; R3 is hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C2-
Cβaminoalkyl, or mono-or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoC2-C6alkyl; R4 and R5 are: (i) independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, C2-Cealkynyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and
C2-C6alkyl ether; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, cyano, oxo, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-
C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, and 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; such that at least one of
R4 and R5 is substituted with a nitrogen-containing heterocycle or an amine; or (ii) taken together to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci- Cβhaloalkyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C2alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, phenylCo-C2alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and
Rg is hydrogen, amino, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβaminoalkyl, or mono-or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C6alkyl.
6. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 5, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000108_0001
wherein: p is 1, 2 or 3;
Re represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; and
R7 is Ci-Cealkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C?cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
7. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 5, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000109_0001
wherein: p is 0, 1, 2 or 3;
Re represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; and
Rs is mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C2alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co- C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2- C6alkenyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-C6haloalkoxy, Ci-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl and 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl.
8. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 5, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000109_0002
wherein: p and q are independently 1, 2 or 3;
Re represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; and
R7 is Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
9. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 5-8, wherein:
X, W and Y are carbon; and Z is oxygen or sulfur.
10. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 5-8, wherein:
X, W and Y are carbon; and Z is nitrogen or NR3.
11. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 5-8, wherein:
X and W are carbon;
Y is nitrogen; and
Z is nitrogen or NR3.
12. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 5-8, wherein:
X and W are carbon;
Y is nitrogen; and Z is CR3.
13. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 5-11, wherein:
W is carbon; and exactly one of A, B, D and E is nitrogen.
14. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 5-11, wherein:
W is carbon;
A is nitrogen; and exactly one of B, D and E is nitrogen.
15. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 5-12, wherein A, B, D and E are independently chosen from CRi.
16. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 5-12, wherein:
A is carbon; and exactly two of B, D and E are nitrogen.
17. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1, 5 or 9- 16, wherein:
Figure imgf000111_0001
R5 is hydrogen or Ci-Cβalkyl;
Re represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl and Ci-
C6haloalkyl;
R7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Q-Cβalkyl; and Rio and Rn are independently chosen from: (i) hydrogen; and
(ii) Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, and groups that are taken together to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, cyano, Ci-C4alkyl mono- or di-(Ci-C4alkyl)amino.
18. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 5, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000111_0002
wherein:
Z is oxygen, sulfur Or NR3;
A, B, D and E are independently nitrogen or CRi; such that exactly zero, one or two of A, B, D and E are nitrogen; Re represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl and Ci-
Cβhaloalkyl; and R7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Cs-Cβalkyl.
19. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 5, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000112_0001
wherein:
Z is nitrogen or CR3;
A, B, D and E are independently nitrogen or CRi; such that exactly zero, one or two of A, B, D and E are nitrogen; Rβ represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl and Ci-
Cβhaloalkyl; and R7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Cs-Cβalkyl.
20. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 5, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000112_0002
wherein: Z nitrogen or CR3;
B, D and E are independently nitrogen or CRi; such that exactly zero, one or two of B, D and E are nitrogen; Re represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl and Ci-
Cβhaloalkyl; and R7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Cs-Cβalkyl.
21. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-20, wherein each Ri is independently chosen from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci- Cehaloalkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-C6alkanoyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl.
I l l
22. A compound of the Formula:
Figure imgf000113_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein:
G, J and K are independently nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or CRi;
Q and T are independently carbon or nitrogen;
P and U are independently CR3 or nitrogen; n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; m is 0, 1 or 2;
0 is 1 or 2;
Each Ri is independently:
(i) hydrogen, amino, halogen, cyano, hydroxy, nitro or oxo; or
(ii) Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkylsulfonyl, mono-or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminoCo-C4alkyl, phenylCo-C2alkyl or (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)Co- C2alkyl; each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with oxo, Ci-Cβalkyl, or Ci- Cβalkoxy;
R2 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge;
R3 is hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C2- Cβaminoalkyl, or mono-or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoC2-C6alkyl;
R4 and R5 are:
(i) independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, C2-Cealkynyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and C2-C6alkyl ether; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, cyano, oxo, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, and 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; such that at least one of R4 and R5 is substituted with a nitrogen-containing heterocycle or an amine; or
(ii) taken together to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, C2-Cealkynyl, Ci- Cβhaloalkyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C2alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, phenylCo-C2alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
23. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 22, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000114_0001
wherein: p is 1, 2 or 3;
Re represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; and
R7 is Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-Cealkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
24. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 22, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000114_0002
wherein: p is 0, 1, 2 or 3;
Re represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; and
Rg is mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoCo-C2alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co- C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2- Cβalkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl and 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl.
25. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 22, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000115_0001
wherein: p and q are independently 0, 1, 2 or 3;
Re represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl and groups that are taken together to form a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; and
R7 is Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, nitro, halogen, amino, cyano, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cβhaloalkoxy, Ci-Cβalkylthio, C2-Cealkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, Cs-Cβalkanone, Ci-Cβalkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C3-C?cycloalkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
26. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 22-25, wherein: Q and U are nitrogen; T is carbon; and P is CH.
27. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 22-25, wherein:
P and T are nitrogen; Q is carbon; and U is CH.
28. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 22-21, wherein:
G is nitrogen; and J and K are CH.
29. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 22-27 ', wherein:
K is nitrogen; and J and G are CH.
30. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 22, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000116_0001
wherein:
G, J and K are independently nitrogen or CRi; such that exactly zero, one or two of G, J and K are nitrogen; Re represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl and Ci-
Cβhaloalkyl; and R7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Cs-Cβalkyl.
31. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 22, wherein:
Figure imgf000117_0001
Rβ represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl and Ci-
Cβhaloalkyl;
R7 is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl or Cs-Cβalkyl; R5 is hydrogen or Ci-Cβalkyl; and Rio and Rn are independently chosen from: (i) hydrogen; and
(ii) Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, and groups that are taken together to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, cyano, Ci-C4alkyl mono- or di-(Ci-C4alkyl)amino.
32. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 22-31, wherein each Ri is independently chosen from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci- Cehaloalkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-C6alkanoyl, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl.
33. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-32, wherein the compound is capable of exhibiting a K1 value of 1 micromolar or less, as determined using an assay for H3 receptor GTP binding.
34. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 33, wherein the compound is capable of exhibiting a K1 value of 100 nanomolar or less, as determined using an assay for H3 receptor GTP binding.
35. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising at least one compound or salt according to any one of claims 1-34 in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
36. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 35 wherein the composition is formulated as an injectible fluid, an aerosol, a cream, a gel, a pill, a capsule, a syrup or a transdermal patch.
37. A method for treating a condition responsive to H3 receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-34, and thereby alleviating the condition in the patient.
38. A method according to claim 37, wherein the compound exhibits H3 receptor antagonist activity.
39. A method according to claim 37, wherein the condition is attention deficit disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, dementia, schizophrenia, a cognitive disorder, epilepsy, migraine, excessive daytime sleepiness, shift work sleep disorder, jet lag, fatigue or a fatigue- related disorder, narcolepsy, sleep apnea, allergic rhinitis, vertigo, motion sickness, a memory disorder, or Parkinson's disease.
40. A method according to claim 37, wherein the condition is obesity, an eating disorder or diabetes.
41. A method according to any one of claims 36-40, wherein the patient is a human.
42. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-32, wherein the compound or salt is radiolabeled.
43. A method for determining the presence or absence of H3 receptor in a sample, comprising the steps of:
(a) contacting a sample with a compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-32, under conditions that permit binding of the compound to H3 receptor; and
(b) detecting a level of the compound bound to H3 receptor, and therefrom determining the presence or absence of H3 receptor in the sample.
44. A method according to claim 43, wherein the compound is radiolabeled, and wherein the step of detection comprises the steps of:
(i) separating unbound compound from bound compound; and
(ii) detecting the presence or absence of bound compound in the sample.
45. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation, comprising:
(a) a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 35 in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat a condition responsive to H3 receptor modulation in a patient.
46. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation according to claim 45, wherein the condition is attention deficit disorder, attention deficit disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, dementia, schizophrenia, a cognitive disorder, epilepsy, migraine, excessive daytime sleepiness, shift work sleep disorder, jet lag, fatigue or a fatigue-related disorder, narcolepsy, sleep apnea, allergic rhinitis, vertigo, motion sickness, a memory disorder, or Parkinson's disease.
47. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation according to claim 45, wherein the condition is obesity, an eating disorder or diabetes.
48. The use of a compound or salt according to any one of claims 1-34 for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a condition responsive to H3 receptor modulation.
49. A use according to claim 48, wherein the condition is attention deficit disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, dementia, schizophrenia, a cognitive disorder, epilepsy, migraine, excessive daytime sleepiness, shift work sleep disorder, jet lag, fatigue or a fatigue- related disorder, narcolepsy, sleep apnea, allergic rhinitis, vertigo, motion sickness, a memory disorder, or Parkinson's disease.
50. A use according to claim 48, wherein the condition is obesity, an eating disorder or diabetes.
51. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 1, wherein the compound is:
1 -(4-cyclobutyl-piperazin- 1 -yl)-2-(l ,2-dihydro-4H-3,8a,9-triaza-fluoren-3 -yl)-ethanone; l-(4-cyclobutyl-piperazin-l-yl)-2-(2-methyl-5,8-dihydro-6H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3- d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-ethanone;
1 -(4-cyclobutyl-piperazin- l-yl)-2-(3 ,4-dihydro-l H-benzo[4,5]furo[2,3-c]pyridin-2-yl)- ethanone;
1 -(4-cyclobutyl-piperazin- 1 -yl)-2-(3,4-dihydro- 1 H-benzo[4,5]thieno[2,3 -c]pyridin-2-yl)- ethanone;
1 -(4-cyclobutyl-piperazin- l-yl)-2-(5, 8-dihydro-6H-pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidin-7- yl)-ethanone; -[2-(l ,3 '-bipyrrolidin- 1 '-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3 ,4,9-tetrahydro- 1 H-beta-carboline; -[2-(l,4'-bipiperidin-l'-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline ; -[2-(2-methyl-l,4'-bipiperidin-r-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline ;-[2-(4-allylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline; -[2-(4-butyl- 1 ,4-diazepan- 1 -yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2, 3 ,4,9-tetrahydro- 1 H-beta-carboline; -[2-(4-butylpiperazin- 1 -yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2, 3, 4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline; -[2-(4-cyclobutyl-l,4-diazepan-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline;-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline; -[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline-6- carbonitrile; -[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-5-fluoro-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline;-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-6-fluoro-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline;-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin- 1 -yl)-2-oxoethyl]-6-fluoro-9-methyl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro- 1 H-beta- carboline; -[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-6-methoxy-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta- carboline; -[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-6-methoxy-9-methyl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH- beta-carboline; -[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-6-methyl-2,3, 4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline;-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-6-pyrimidin-5-yl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta- carboline; -[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-7-fluoro-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline;-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-7-methoxy-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-pyrido[4,3- b]indole; -[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-7-pyrimidin-5-yl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta- carboline; -[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-8-fluoro-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline;-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin- 1 -yl)-2-oxoethyl]-8-methoxy- 1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrazino[ 1 ,2- a]indole; -[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin- 1 -yl)-2-oxoethyl]-9-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro- 1 H- beta-carboline; -[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin- 1 -yl)-2-oxoethyl]-9-ethyl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro- 1 H-beta-carboline;-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-9-isopropyl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta- carboline; -[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-9-methyl-2,3, 4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline;-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-9-phenyl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline;-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-9-propyl-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline;-[2-(4-cyclohexylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline; 2-[2-(4-cyclopentylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline;
2-[2-(4-ethylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline;
2-[2-(4-isobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline;
2-[2-(4-isopropyl-l,4-diazepan-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline;
2-[2-(4-isopropylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline;
2-[2-(4-propylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline;
2-[2-(6-methyloctahydro-2H-pyrido[l,2-a]pyrazin-2-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro- 1571H-beta-carboline;
2-[2-(octahydro-2H-pyrido[l,2-a]pyrazin-2-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta- carboline;
2-[2-oxo-2-(4-pyrrolidin- 1 -ylpiperidin- 1 -yl)ethyl]-2,3 ,4,9-tetrahydro-l H-beta-carboline;
2-{2-[4-(2-methylcyclopentyl)piperazin-l-yl]-2-oxoethyl}-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta- carboline;
2-{2-oxo-2-[4-(l-phenylethyl)piperazin-l-yl]ethyl}-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline;
2-{2-oxo-2-[4-(2-piperidin-l-ylethyl)piperazin-l-yl]ethyl}-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta- carboline;
2- {2-oxo-2-[4-(2-pyrrolidin- 1 -ylethyl)piperazin- 1 -yl]ethyl} -2,3,4,9-tetrahydro- lH-beta- carboline;
2-{2-oxo-2-[4-(3-piperidin-l-ylpropyl)piperazin-l-yl]ethyl}-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta- carboline;
2-{2-oxo-2-[4-(3-pyrrolidin-l-ylpropyl)piperazin-l-yl]ethyl}-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta- carboline;
2-{2-oxo-2-[4-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)piperazin-l-yl]ethyl}-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta- carboline;
6-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-5,6,7,8-tetrahydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrido[3,4- d]pyrimidine;
6-bromo-2-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-lH-beta-carboline;
7-[2-(4-cyclobutyl-piperazin-l-yl)-2-oxo-ethyl]-3-methyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-3H- pyrido[4',3':4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-one;
7-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-5,6,7,8-tetrahydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrido[4,3- d]pyrimidine;
7-[2-(4-cyclobutylpiperazin-l-yl)-2-oxoethyl]-9-methyl-6,7,8,9-tetrahydro-5H- pyrido[4',3':4,5]pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine;
N-(l-methylpiperidin-4-yl)-N-ethyl-2-(l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2-yl)acetamide; N-( 1 -methylpiperidin-4-yl)-N-propyl-2-( 1 ,3 ,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2-yl)acetamide;
N-(2-methoxyethyl)-N-(l-methylpiperidin-4-yl)-2-(l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2- yl)acetamide;
N-(cyclopropylmethyl)-N-propyl- 1 -(1 ,3 ,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2-ylacetyl)piperidin- 4-amine; N,N-diethyl- 1 -( 1 ,3 ,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2-ylacetyl)piperidin-4-amine; N,N-diethyl- 1 -( 1 ,3 ,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2-ylacetyl)pyrrolidin-3 -amine; N-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-N-methyl-2-(l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2-yl)acetamide;
N-[3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-N-(l-methylpiperidin-4-yl)-2-(l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta- carbolin-2-yl)acetamide; or
N-methyl-N-(l-ethylpiperidin-4-yl)-2-(l,3,4,9-tetrahydro-2H-beta-carbolin-2-yl)acetamide.
PCT/US2008/068115 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues WO2009003003A2 (en)

Priority Applications (9)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2008268442A AU2008268442A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues
BRPI0813647-5A2A BRPI0813647A2 (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 PIPERAZINIL OXOALQUIL TETRAHYDRO-BETA CARBOLINS AND RELATED ANALOGS
JP2010515057A JP2010531364A (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Piperazinyloxoalkyltetrahydro-β-carbolines and related analogs
US12/666,314 US20110002855A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues
EP08780968A EP2162451A4 (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues
CA2690748A CA2690748A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues
CN200880104013A CN101784541A (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Piperazinyl oxoalkyl group tetrahydrochysene-β-Ka Lin and related analogs
MX2009013897A MX2009013897A (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues.
IL202699A IL202699A0 (en) 2007-06-25 2009-12-13 Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US94595907P 2007-06-25 2007-06-25
US60/945,959 2007-06-25

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2009003003A2 true WO2009003003A2 (en) 2008-12-31
WO2009003003A3 WO2009003003A3 (en) 2009-02-19

Family

ID=40186267

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2008/068115 WO2009003003A2 (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues

Country Status (11)

Country Link
US (1) US20110002855A1 (en)
EP (1) EP2162451A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2010531364A (en)
KR (1) KR20100040872A (en)
CN (1) CN101784541A (en)
AU (1) AU2008268442A1 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0813647A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2690748A1 (en)
IL (1) IL202699A0 (en)
MX (1) MX2009013897A (en)
WO (1) WO2009003003A2 (en)

Cited By (29)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2950891A1 (en) * 2009-10-06 2011-04-08 Sanofi Aventis New pyrrolo-dipyridine azacarboline derivatives are protein kinase inhibitors useful for treating cancer
US8049005B2 (en) 2009-03-31 2011-11-01 Arqule, Inc. Substituted tetrahydropyrazolo-pyrido-azepine compounds
WO2012127885A1 (en) 2011-03-18 2012-09-27 小野薬品工業株式会社 Tetrahydrocarboline derivative
US8598197B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2013-12-03 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US8618299B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2013-12-31 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azapolycycle MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US8629158B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2014-01-14 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azabicycloalkane-indole and azabicycloalkane-pyrrolo-pyridine MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US8637501B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2014-01-28 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azepino[b]indole and pyrido-pyrrolo-azepine MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US8691830B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2014-04-08 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US8697700B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2014-04-15 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Piperazinone-substituted tetrahydro-carboline MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and uses thereof
US8716308B2 (en) 2008-01-11 2014-05-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. (1-azinone)-substituted pyridoindoles
WO2014207240A1 (en) * 2013-06-28 2014-12-31 Alzprotect Carboline compounds usable in the treatment of neurodegenerative diseases
US8993765B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2015-03-31 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Tetrahydro-azacarboline MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and uses thereof
US9006244B2 (en) 2012-03-16 2015-04-14 Vitae Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liver X receptor modulators
US9073925B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2015-07-07 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azabicycloalkane-indole and azabicycloalkane-pyrrolo-pyridine MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US9073931B2 (en) 2012-03-16 2015-07-07 Vitae Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liver X receptor modulators
WO2015181063A1 (en) * 2014-05-26 2015-12-03 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted tetrahydropyridothienopyrimidines
US9260442B2 (en) 2012-03-29 2016-02-16 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Lactam kinase inhibitors
US9464092B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-10-11 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Transient protection of normal cells during chemotherapy
US9717735B2 (en) 2014-04-17 2017-08-01 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Tricyclic lactams for use in HSPC-sparing treatments for RB-positive abnormal cellular proliferation
US10231969B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2019-03-19 GI Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-neoplastic combinations and dosing regimens using CDK4/6 inhibitor compounds to treat RB-positive tumors
US10278957B2 (en) 2017-09-11 2019-05-07 Protagonist Therapeutics, Inc. Opioid agonist peptides and uses thereof
US10413547B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2019-09-17 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Treatment of Rb-negative tumors using topoisomerase with cyclin dependent kinase 4/6 inhibitors
US10709711B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-07-14 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Highly active anti-neoplastic and anti-proliferative agents
US10988479B1 (en) 2020-06-15 2021-04-27 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Morphic forms of trilaciclib and methods of manufacture thereof
US11021514B2 (en) 2016-06-01 2021-06-01 Athira Pharma, Inc. Compounds
US11261193B2 (en) 2017-06-29 2022-03-01 GI Therapeutics, Inc. Morphic forms of G1T38 and methods of manufacture thereof
US11364222B2 (en) 2017-01-06 2022-06-21 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Combination therapy for treatment of cancer
US11369603B2 (en) 2017-04-19 2022-06-28 Novartis Ag Use of a H3R inverse agonist for the treatment of shift work disorder
US11708337B2 (en) 2018-08-24 2023-07-25 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Synthesis of 1,4-diazaspiro[5.5]undecan-3-one

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3554494A4 (en) 2016-12-19 2021-02-17 Cellixbio Private Limited Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammation
US10947253B2 (en) 2019-08-05 2021-03-16 Ankh Life Sciences Limited Fused polycyclic dimers
WO2023023474A1 (en) * 2021-08-16 2023-02-23 Senya Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tr-beta modulators, pharmaceutical compositions, and therapeutic applications
CN114276359B (en) * 2022-01-05 2023-05-05 浙江大学 Preparation method of 1,2,3, 4-tetrahydrobenzo [4,5] furan [2,3-C ] pyridine derivative

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5776963A (en) * 1989-05-19 1998-07-07 Hoechst Marion Roussel, Inc. 3-(heteroaryl)-1- (2,3-dihydro-1h-isoindol-2-yl)alkyl!pyrrolidines and 3-(heteroaryl)-1- (2,3-dihydro-1h-indol-1-yl)alkyl!pyrrolidines and related compounds and their therapeutic untility
EA001539B1 (en) * 1996-11-27 2001-04-23 Пфайзер Инк. Amides ingibiting secretion of b apolyprotein (apo b) and/or microsome protein triglycerides transfer (mtr)
CN1158258C (en) * 1999-06-24 2004-07-21 东丽株式会社 Alpha 1 beta-adrenergic receptor antagonists
AR038366A1 (en) * 2001-11-30 2005-01-12 Schering Corp 1,2,4-TRIAZOLO COMPOUNDS [1,5-C] SUBSTITUTED PYRIMIDINS, ANTAGONISTS OF THE ADENOSINE A2A RECEPTOR, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS, THE USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF A MEDICINAL PRODUCT FOR THE PROCESSING OF DISEASE SYSTEMS AND CENTRAL SYSTEMS A KIT THAT INCLUDES COMBINATION
NZ555491A (en) * 2005-01-03 2010-01-29 Univ Siena Aryl piperazine derivatives for the treatment of neuropsychiatric disorders
US7851474B2 (en) * 2005-08-02 2010-12-14 Neurogen Corporation Dipiperazinyl ketones and related analogues

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See references of EP2162451A4 *

Cited By (70)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8716308B2 (en) 2008-01-11 2014-05-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. (1-azinone)-substituted pyridoindoles
US9650378B2 (en) 2008-01-11 2017-05-16 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. (1-azinone)-substituted pyridoindoles
US9296743B2 (en) 2008-01-11 2016-03-29 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. (1-azinone)-substituted pyridoindoles
US8049005B2 (en) 2009-03-31 2011-11-01 Arqule, Inc. Substituted tetrahydropyrazolo-pyrido-azepine compounds
US8293892B2 (en) 2009-03-31 2012-10-23 Arqule, Inc. Substituted tetrahydropyrazolo-pyrido-azepine compounds
US9073925B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2015-07-07 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azabicycloalkane-indole and azabicycloalkane-pyrrolo-pyridine MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US8618299B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2013-12-31 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azapolycycle MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US8629158B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2014-01-14 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azabicycloalkane-indole and azabicycloalkane-pyrrolo-pyridine MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US8637501B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2014-01-28 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azepino[b]indole and pyrido-pyrrolo-azepine MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
FR2950891A1 (en) * 2009-10-06 2011-04-08 Sanofi Aventis New pyrrolo-dipyridine azacarboline derivatives are protein kinase inhibitors useful for treating cancer
US8598186B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2013-12-03 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US8598197B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2013-12-03 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US9481691B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2016-11-01 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US8829012B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2014-09-09 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US10189850B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2019-01-29 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US10189849B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2019-01-29 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US9957276B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2018-05-01 GI Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US9102682B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2015-08-11 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US8822683B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2014-09-02 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US10927120B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2021-02-23 GI Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US9499564B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2016-11-22 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US10696682B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2020-06-30 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US10189851B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2019-01-29 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US8691830B2 (en) 2010-10-25 2014-04-08 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. CDK inhibitors
US8697700B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2014-04-15 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Piperazinone-substituted tetrahydro-carboline MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and uses thereof
US8993765B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2015-03-31 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Tetrahydro-azacarboline MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and uses thereof
WO2012127885A1 (en) 2011-03-18 2012-09-27 小野薬品工業株式会社 Tetrahydrocarboline derivative
US9006245B2 (en) 2012-03-16 2015-04-14 Vitae Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liver X receptor modulators
US9416135B2 (en) 2012-03-16 2016-08-16 Vitae Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liver X receptor modulators
US9388190B2 (en) 2012-03-16 2016-07-12 Vitae Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liver X receptor modulators
US9707232B2 (en) 2012-03-16 2017-07-18 Vitae Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liver X receptor modulators
US9073931B2 (en) 2012-03-16 2015-07-07 Vitae Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liver X receptor modulators
US9006244B2 (en) 2012-03-16 2015-04-14 Vitae Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liver X receptor modulators
US9814715B2 (en) 2012-03-16 2017-11-14 Vitae Pharamceuticals, Inc. Liver X receptor modulators
US9856268B2 (en) 2012-03-29 2018-01-02 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Lactam kinase inhibitors
US10464940B2 (en) 2012-03-29 2019-11-05 GI Therapeutics, Inc. Lactam kinase inhibitors
US9260442B2 (en) 2012-03-29 2016-02-16 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Lactam kinase inhibitors
US9745316B2 (en) 2012-03-29 2017-08-29 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Lactam kinase inhibitors
US10434104B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-10-08 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. HSPC-sparing treatments for Rb-positive abnormal cellular proliferation
US9487530B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-11-08 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Transient protection of normal cells during chemotherapy
US10925878B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2021-02-23 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. HSPC-sparing treatments for RB-positive abnormal cellular proliferation
US10076523B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-09-18 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. HSPC-sparing treatments for RB-positive abnormal cellular proliferation
US10085992B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-10-02 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Transient protection of normal cells during chemotherapy
US10966984B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2021-04-06 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Transient protection of normal cells during chemotherapy
US9527857B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-12-27 GI Therapeutics, Inc. HSPC-sparing treatments for RB-positive abnormal cellular proliferation
US10660896B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-05-26 GI Therapeutics, Inc. Transient protection of normal cells during chemotherapy
US9931345B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-04-03 Presidents And Fellows Of Harvard College Transient protection of normal cells during chemotherapy
US11717523B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2023-08-08 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Transient protection of normal cells during chemotherapy
US11040042B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2021-06-22 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Transient protection of normal cells during chemotherapy
US11654148B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2023-05-23 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. HSPC-sparing treatments for RB-positive abnormal cellular proliferation
US9464092B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-10-11 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Transient protection of normal cells during chemotherapy
US10709711B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-07-14 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Highly active anti-neoplastic and anti-proliferative agents
US9714245B2 (en) 2013-06-28 2017-07-25 Alzprotect Carboline compounds usable in the treatment of neurodegenerative diseases
JP2016523278A (en) * 2013-06-28 2016-08-08 アルツプロテクト Carboline compounds that can be used to treat neurodegenerative diseases
WO2014207240A1 (en) * 2013-06-28 2014-12-31 Alzprotect Carboline compounds usable in the treatment of neurodegenerative diseases
US10376519B2 (en) 2014-04-17 2019-08-13 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Tricyclic lactams for use in HSPC-sparing treatments for Rb-positive abnormal cellular proliferation
US9717735B2 (en) 2014-04-17 2017-08-01 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Tricyclic lactams for use in HSPC-sparing treatments for RB-positive abnormal cellular proliferation
WO2015181063A1 (en) * 2014-05-26 2015-12-03 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted tetrahydropyridothienopyrimidines
US10231969B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2019-03-19 GI Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-neoplastic combinations and dosing regimens using CDK4/6 inhibitor compounds to treat RB-positive tumors
US11090306B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2021-08-17 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Treatment of Rb-negative tumors using topoisomerase inhibitors in combination with cyclin dependent kinase 4/6 inhibitors
US11446295B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2022-09-20 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-neoplastic combinations and dosing regimens using CDK4/6 inhibitor compounds to treat Rb-positive tumors
US10413547B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2019-09-17 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Treatment of Rb-negative tumors using topoisomerase with cyclin dependent kinase 4/6 inhibitors
US11021514B2 (en) 2016-06-01 2021-06-01 Athira Pharma, Inc. Compounds
US11364222B2 (en) 2017-01-06 2022-06-21 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Combination therapy for treatment of cancer
US11369603B2 (en) 2017-04-19 2022-06-28 Novartis Ag Use of a H3R inverse agonist for the treatment of shift work disorder
US11261193B2 (en) 2017-06-29 2022-03-01 GI Therapeutics, Inc. Morphic forms of G1T38 and methods of manufacture thereof
US10729676B2 (en) 2017-09-11 2020-08-04 Protagonist Theraputics, Inc. Opioid agonist peptides and uses thereof
US10278957B2 (en) 2017-09-11 2019-05-07 Protagonist Therapeutics, Inc. Opioid agonist peptides and uses thereof
US11708337B2 (en) 2018-08-24 2023-07-25 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Synthesis of 1,4-diazaspiro[5.5]undecan-3-one
US10988479B1 (en) 2020-06-15 2021-04-27 G1 Therapeutics, Inc. Morphic forms of trilaciclib and methods of manufacture thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2162451A2 (en) 2010-03-17
AU2008268442A1 (en) 2008-12-31
KR20100040872A (en) 2010-04-21
CA2690748A1 (en) 2008-12-31
US20110002855A1 (en) 2011-01-06
MX2009013897A (en) 2010-03-30
WO2009003003A3 (en) 2009-02-19
EP2162451A4 (en) 2012-04-18
BRPI0813647A2 (en) 2014-12-23
IL202699A0 (en) 2010-06-30
JP2010531364A (en) 2010-09-24
CN101784541A (en) 2010-07-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2162451A2 (en) Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydro-beta-carbolines and related analogues
EP2029588A2 (en) Tetrahydropyrido[3,4-d]pyrimidines and related analogues
EP1998620B1 (en) Piperazinyl oxoalkyl tetrahydroisoquinolines and related analogues
US20080247964A1 (en) Substituted azaspiro derivatives
US20100317679A1 (en) Substituted aryl-fused spirocyclic amines
JP2009506987A (en) Dipiperazinyl ketone and related analogs
JP5501230B2 (en) Quinoline compounds suitable for the treatment of disorders responsive to modulation of serotonin 5-HT6 receptors
US20100297035A1 (en) Thiazole Amides, Imidazole Amides and Related Analogues
JP2022550459A (en) Antagonists of the muscarinic acetylcholine receptor M4
WO2009100120A2 (en) Pyridinyl-substituted piperazinyl oxoethyl tetrahydropyrazolopyridines
TW200813051A (en) Substituted azaspiro derivatives
FR2953839A1 (en) NOVEL (HETEROCYCLE-PIPERIDINE CONDENSEE) - (PIPERAZINYL) -1ALCANONE OR (HETEROCYCLE-PYRROLIDINE CONDENSED) - (PIPERAZINYL) -1ALCANONE DERIVATIVES AND THEIR USE AS INHIBITORS OF P75
JP2022554385A (en) WDR5 inhibitors and modulators

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200880104013.6

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 08780968

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2690748

Country of ref document: CA

Ref document number: 8123/DELNP/2009

Country of ref document: IN

Ref document number: 2008780968

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008268442

Country of ref document: AU

Ref document number: 581905

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/A/2009/013897

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2010515057

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2008268442

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20080625

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20107001683

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12666314

Country of ref document: US

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: PI0813647

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20091223